Home

Untitled

1. Top ita Map Hale Print E nm Canon MF Driver Installation Guide yso o F Intreductiarn F Hex About the Drivers and Software b Supported Operating systems Selecting the Driver to Bc Installed Installing from the Supplied CD ROM DAVTS ROM Installing after Downloading from the Canon Website Installing to Use WSD Chapter icons Click to jump to the table of contents of the selected chapter I Topic titles Displays titles and topics Click a title to jump to the corresponding topic page Click to return to the page top O a w Click to go to the previous or next chapter 41 47 0L90 00W Viewing the Installation Guide Marks Restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the printer useful tips and other information are indicated using the marks below IMPORTANT Indicates operational requirements and restrictions Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the printer correctly and avoid damage to the printer or property NOTE Indicates a clarification of an operation or contains additional explanations for a procedure Buttons Buttons on the computer display are indicated with the following notation Example from the Installation Guide Next Computer Screens Depending on the operating system you are using the appearance of the displays in this guide may differ slightly from the displays that you see Also the appearance of MF Drivers and
2. Density ER Adjust the density Auto Density Manual Density EICICIOMDICIDICI Auto Density An optimal density for the document is automatically set Original Type is automatically set to Text Selecting Document Type M Manual Density Use 44 to adjust the density LINKS Basic Copy Operations Adjusting Sharpness 2 Correct Density 61 336 Adjusting Sharpness OL40 01K You can adjust sharpness of the copied image Increase the sharpness to sharpen blurred text and lines or decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of magazine photos m mJ COPY SCAN Sharpness p Adjust the sharpness Sharpness e 3 D00 4000 A lt gt Press 4 Decreases the sharpness resulting in a softer image Example If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos No change to sharpness Heaort Plan Th Mehr Decreased sharpness Resort Plan The world s coral reets where M lt gt Press Increases the image sharpness Example If you want to sharpen text and lines written in pencil No change to sharpness Heseao ct Fian Increased sharpness Hesort Plan The world s coral reefs where brillianthuzo fish and a myriad of other tropical LINKS Basic Copy Operations Adjusting Density 62 336 OL40 01R Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet 2 on 1 4 on 1 You can copy two
3. The screen that is displayed differs depending on the application you are using 3 Specify the print settings such as the number of copies and print orientation and click OK A Tabs Click each tab to display the print setting screens and specify the print settings as necessary Various Print Settings 5 Copies Specify the number of copies Orientation Specify the print orientation Portrait or Landscape The orientation setting for the document that is specified on the application is usually reflected on the printer driver NOTE You can register the settings you specified in this step as a profile and use the profile whenever you print You can eliminate the need to specify the same settings every time you print Q Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print Settings TIPS Clickable UI You can easily specify the page layout binding position etc intuitively on the preview image For more information click 70 336 Help on the printer driver screen Select Pite Te ada friren Caron MEILI Sere IPS ie Canen MFD Series im Lanon MEAD Senes FAX Carai Page Farge wu bn cin Dpi Paga Faga 1455555 inter ether single page number ara mie pagaranga For ample 5 12 Printing starts On some applications a screen like shown below appears To cancel printing click Cancel when the screen shown above is displayed After the screen disappears or if the screen is no
4. ir Forse rime Sean cannes brege or eame Penge OF Serve Pichues la a Subiokder yth Cuni Dade i E vanal Application Deng and dop an application mon bas ky regeer Pionir of ha 5 canned egt and ES Setting NOTE For Macintosh users available functions vary For Mac OS Users OG Configuring Scan Settings Q Configuring Storing Settings QSpecifying External Applications to Forward Scanned Data Configure the scan settings such as the original document size color mode and resolution Qo E D inaia he iconem Creve e Ease Scared brage lo tra Hara Hail Tas e TED ares Scargund rege to NT A F arem Pichon En a sible pelis Curen Dui ra E meal Prigi hiona Wach Feriae 7 Dasfirredene of the Scammed nage nd E eil Etngs Bmw ie ee A Select Source Select the location where the document was placed Select Platen Glass Paper Size 127 336 Select the document size If you select an option for a custom size the Paper Size Settings screen opens You can then enter a custom size A Scan Mode Select the image type to scan documents Available items vary depending on the type of scan such as Mail or PDF Black and The document is scanned as a black and white image in black and white only with no intermediate White shades of gray Black and The document is scanned as a black and white image optimized for processing by OCR optical character White OCR reco
5. P Manual feed cover Open this slot to load paper in the manual feed slot F3 Paper guides Adjust the paper guides to exactly the width of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the machine LINKS Q Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot 21 336 OL40 00E Paper Drawer P Dust cover Open this cover to load paper in the paper drawer F Paper guides Adjust the paper guides to exactly the size of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the machine LINKS Q Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer 22 336 OL40 0A6 Operation Panel MF212w MF211 m EZ COPY BS Scan PCt ScanePC2 3 Menu key Press to start specifying many of the settings for the machine such as Timer Settings or Preferences Setting Menu List FI COPY SCAN key Press to switch the mode to copy or scan 3 ID Card Copy key Press to enter a mode for copying the front and back sides of a driver s license or other ID card onto the same side of a page at actual size G Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page P Display Displays the operation and status screens for copying and other functions as well as the status of the machine and error information Also view the screen when specifying the settings of the machine P Reset key Press to cancel the settings and restore the previously specified settings Dq 1 key When specifying settings press to retur
6. 6 Close the toner cover and lower the operation panel NOTE If you cannot close the toner cover Make sure that the toner cartridge is inserted properly Forcing it closed may cause damage LINKS Q Replacing Toner Cartridges 283 336 OL40 08E How to Replace Toner Cartridges Read the precautions in Maintenance and Inspections and Consumables before replacing the toner cartridges 1 Lift the operation panel NOTE If you cannot lift the operation panel Make sure the platen glass cover is completely closed If a thick original such as a book is placed on the platen glass remove the Original Forcing the operation panel up may cause damage 2 Open the toner cover by the grip at the front right of the toner cover 3 Pull the toner cartridge out of the machine 4 Remove the replacement toner cartridge from the protective bag 5 Shake the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times as shown below to evenly distribute the toner inside the cartridge and then place it on a flat surface 284 336 6 Pull the sealing tape straight out The full length of the sealing tape is approximately 50 cm IMPORTANT When pulling out the sealing tape If the sealing tape remains inside the toner cartridge the quality of printouts may deteriorate Do not pull out the sealing tape at an angle or sideways If the tape breaks you may not be able to pull it out completely If the sealing tape becomes stuck when
7. Caneel i ag Ll r Bee 1 0 Select your printer and click Next 28 47 Install the printer driver tice your preter Hem thet ba Chick Wo rides Update bo sec rene Siih Te petal the descr orm an imita lan eni CD click Harve Desk Thee printer will be inztalled with tha Canen PIE lee river u The installation starts 1 2 Select Do not share this printer and click Next If you want to share the printer make sharing settings for the printer added with Adding a Network Printer Setting Up Print Server e Manual Printer Sharing H you warf to sbar Shin pristar yos muri preeada a ohare rama Yow can una the gonsantas sarma oF type a rena one The chars nare will be wnible in other netaan ut C3 fhas the parme po shat other on pour nebari can fired and ue it 3 Click Finish Vou we successfully added Caes GE LO m 13 Feu can cheese a delmi priate Fes horse viet ard other places you ga 5e up reps Te check rl ycu pratar n working property or in sam frou blunt ong mfosmateon for the pratar print a tesl pae litum Coma c An icon for the installed printer is displayed in the printer folder 29 47 ot Hedware emd Sound Devers and Printers Add a dake Add a printer gt Devices 1 4 Printers and Fares 7 Adding a Network Printer 1 Open the network folder Windows Vista Server 2008 Start select Network Windows 7 Server 2008 R2
8. caenpiul br Appenin Copyright CANTH IEC s ac C M Top Click to return to the top page Site map Click to display all the e Manual topics M Help 319 336 Click to display information on how to view the e Manual how to perform a search and other information Print Click to print the displayed content M Feature Highlights Provides a variety of practical examples of ways to use the machine Click W m E F to toggle the display of practical examples by category or click the sliding display for more information about each category The sliding display can be stopped by moving the pointer onto it Feature Highlights Quick Help Click to view how to solve problems or maintain the machine For Mac OS Users Click to view precautions when using Mac OS Notice Click to view important information you should know when using the machine Office Locations Click to display contact information for any inquiries about the machine Feature Highlights Provides a variety of practical examples of ways to use the machine Top Sig Map Help Pent By Canon age ie amm Just what you were looking for There are a variety of mabures for whebever you need iodo M hore ie the office or eves on the road 01 Using a smartphone tablet 02 Go Wireless Ho cables exey inztallcion simple maintenance IF you ve got a WEE wireless LAN router bypass tha satting
9. 2 Click the document you want to cancel 3 Click Delete Changing AirPrint Settings You can register information including the name of the machine and installation location that is used for identifying the machine You can also disable the AirPrint function of the machine Use the Remote UI to change these settings 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode Starting Remote UI NOTE Depending on your Web browser the procedure to start the Remote UI may be different See the instruction manuals for the Web browser you are using 2 Click Settings Registration If you are using a mobile device such as iPad iPhone or iPod touch read click as tap in this section aoe Ui eu Wife See asp Pam 1513880115 maral rop timi i Mir Coogi ga Derice ferme FIFI eria Li Tad t MM NEUE 514 Vic aacra Lami Upcsemc HU TIENI 04 4 PH e Sabet Mane Hg c e is Click Network Settings AirPrint Settings i Regier tem Macagememrd Settings Meteors whom Menewr Settings 8 TEMIF Seting SIME Sciiga Z Click Edit 96 336 Use AirPrint Select the check box to enable printing with AirPrint To disable AirPrint clear the check box Printer Name Location Latitude Longitude Enter the name and the installation location information
10. 4 Click the icon for the key pair or certificate that you want to verify Zaire Gest ste even Maes are am an by rep x Gary od Cartes tig arai Cevtifer ata ee typ Harma hay A Tefal Gey tortion ms a zl Certificate details can be viewed on this screen Click Certificate Verification 111 336 Banane US Cartoon Deh ME210 Seri ME210 Sera a Er cose JE ch rer 0 jm paczritg bay preci b 27215 iar Pielan Lrageng Product Hi iB Ba TD 3E 13 3C DF EX DC CO UM EIE EO deb 5H ES ACCES LINKS Q Generating Key Pairs QUsing CA issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates 112 336 OL40 04F Using the Machine as a Scanner You can scan original documents by using the operation panel of the machine or an application on a computer Whichever way you use the scanned documents are converted into electronic file formats such as PDFs Use the scan function to convert large volume paper documents into files so that you can organize them easily NOTE To use this machine as a scanner you must complete preparations in advance including installation of software to a computer If you are using a network connection you must register the machine with MF Network Scan Utility Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner MF212w If you are a Macintosh user see MF Driver Installation Guide for installing the software and Canon Scanner Driver Guide for using scan functions For Mac OS Users Depending
11. NOTE Press or select Symbol and press fs when the type of text that is entered is aA to display a screen for selecting symbols Use the A W lp keys to select the symbol to enter and press OK f Deleting Text One character is deleted each time is pressed Press and hold to delete all of the entered text Moving the Cursor Entering a Space Press or J to move the cursor To enter a space move the cursor to the end of the text and press J Example of Entering Text and Numbers Example Canon 1 Press repeatedly until lt aA gt is selected Press repeatedly until the letter C is selected Press FJ repeatedly until the letter a is selected Press r3 repeatedly until the letter n is selected Press repeatedly until the letter o is selected Press repeatedly until the symbol is selected Press repeatedly until 12 is selected Press ER Press A W to highlight Apply and then press OK 1 2 3 A 5 6 Press repeatedly until the letter n is selected 7 8 9 0 1 33 336 OL40 00R Placing Documents Place documents on the platen glass For information about the types of documents that can be placed on the platen glass and information about the scannable area of a document see Document Type or Scan Area IMPORTANT Use documents that are completely dry When placing documents make sure that any glue ink or correction fluid on the documents has completely d
12. Online User Regisirahiun J Raui Campuler How TF commareded Installing with Custom Installation 1 Log on to the computer with an administrator account 2 Insert the User Software and Manuals CD ROM DVD ROM into the drive on the computer 3 Click Custom Installation 13 47 Canon Software Programs Manuals Setup Easy Installation lainiis the samiai programs aed ihe manuals Custom Installation Stan Softwa Programs Bas progeams cequied for canfiqueng aston elc Manuals Displays manuals F Orne User Registration M en Click Bere te access Canons bome page to register onig med answer a Ques ore Ext J NOTE If you want to install standard software and the e Manual on your computer click Easy Installation If the above screen does not appear see Displaying the CD ROM DVD ROM Setup Screen If AutoPlay is displayed click Run MInst exe 4 Select the connection method with the computer USB Connection Select USB Connection and click Next Select the Type of Connection Suec he spe d Cone hn bebe en me dew and your compute a Ganed Ling 3 LPS cable da connect Ie device do your compute hebeni Sonne on Conrad Bra device ls yow mnp via me ralbwark Fer mera Infor cen on how Coreg cl ea dadce uzim 3 wireless LAS radar so Canons home page Wired Wireless LAN Connection Select Network Connection and click Nex
13. Specify the size of the scanning area For normal cases select the same size as the document To specify the size with values select a unit and enter the values for width and height To lock the width to height ratio of the image click 3i NOTE The image size that can be scanned is limited on some applications A Color Mode Select the image type to scan documents The document is scanned as a black and white image in black and white only with no Black and intermediate shades of gray You can change the threshold that separates text in the White document or the image into black and white with Threshold Adjusting Brightness and Color The document is scanned as a grayscale image in black and white with intermediate shades of gray similar to a black and white photograph Grayscale Color The document is scanned as a color image The document is scanned as a black and white image optimized for processing by OCR optical Text Enhanced character recognition software 136 336 Specify the output resolution and output size Output Resolution Select the resolution of the scanned image that suits your intended use NOTE About the output resolution A resolution of 75 dpi is a rough guide for displaying the scanned image on a computer and 300 dpi for printing or creating a searchable PDF If you double the output resolution the image file size increases by a factor of 4 If the fi
14. When the setup is completed the screen below is displayed and approximately 2 seconds later the Wi Fi indicator lights up Connected a Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed IMPORTANT Signal strength When more than one wireless router is available for connection the machine connects to the device with the strongest signal Signal strength is measured using RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication NOTE Reducing power consumption You can set the machine to enter Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless router Power Save Mode If the IP address of the machine has changed In a DHCP environment the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically If this happens the connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet LINKS Connecting to a Wireless LAN 153 336 OL40 056 Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode If your wireless router supports WPS PIN code mode generate a PIN code with the machine and register the code to the networking device IMPORTANT How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help From a Computer 1 Access your wireless router from a computer and display the screen for entering a WPS PIN code a For more information see the instruction manuals for your networking device S From
15. dh I 00 AM F 0 00 12 59 M End Time Specify a time for exiting quiet mode To set select On then specify the time 49 336 End Time S dip 0 00 12 59 Exiting Quiet Mode Press eg to exit quiet mode 50 336 OL40 018 Entering Sleep Mode The sleep mode function reduces the amount of power consumed by the machine by disabling power flow to the operation panel If no operations will be performed on the machine for a while such as during a lunch break you can save power simply by pressing Ml on the operation panel You can also use the Auto Sleep Time setting to automatically put the machine into sleep mode if it remains idle for a specified length of time ScanePC2 NOTE When in sleep mode When the machine enters sleep mode lights up green Situations in which the machine does not enter sleep mode When the machine is in operation When the Processing Data indicator is lit up or blinking When the machine is performing an operation such as adjustment or cleaning When a paper jam occurs When the menu screen is displayed When an error message is displayed on the screen There are some exceptions The machine sometimes enters sleep mode when error messages are displayed When You Want to Set the Auto Sleep Timer The factory default settings for the amount of time that elapses before the machine enters auto sleep mode are listed below We recommend using the fa
16. lt Adjustment Maintenance gt p lt Special Processing gt Special Mode Z Select the mode Eg Effect less Effect more NOTE After the setting is changed By specifying Off or Mode 1 streaks may adhere to the print paper By specifying Mode 3 or Mode 4 outlines may be blurred or images may appear somewhat grainy The print density becomes lighter as the setting progresses from Off to Mode 4 After printing from a smartphone or tablet 240 336 If streaks adhere to the paper change the setting with Special Mode Z Special Mode B Ea Adjust this setting if streaks adhere to the print paper after replacing the toner cartridge or after not printing for a long period of time E lt Adjustment Maintenance gt p lt Special Processing p lt Special Mode B gt Select the mode e E Effect less Effect more NOTE After the setting is enabled Print speed is slower Special Mode C F3 Adjust this setting if streaks adhere to the print paper Offt On b o lt Adjustment Maintenance gt p Special Processing Special Mode C lt On gt Ld b E NOTE After the setting is enabled When set to On this setting takes priority over the setting for Special Mode Z gt While more effect is gained than with Special Mode Z gt print speed is slower Special Mode D Ed Adjust this setting
17. o 50 m or less v 4 Perform one of the following settings again Q Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode Q Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode Q Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router Q Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings NOTE When you need to manually set up the connection If the wireless router is set as described below manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN connection Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings amp ANY connection refusal is activated amp The WEP key that was automatically generated hexadecimal is selected The stealth mode is activated A function in which the wireless router refuses the connection if the SSID on the device to be connected is set to ANY or is blank When you need to change the settings of the wireless router If the wireless router is set as described below change the settings of the router amp The MAC address packet filtering is set When only IEEE 802 11n is used for the wireless communication WEP is selected or the WPA WPA2 encryption method is set to TKIP 262 336 OL40 07S Copying Problems See Common Problems also Printing results are not satisfactory Paper creases or curls When You Cannot Print Properly 263 336 0L40 07U Printing Problems See Common Problems also Printing results are not satisfactory Paper creases or curls When
18. 1 Double click the printer icon NOTE When the printer icon is not displayed Open the printer folder Displaying the Printer Folder right click your printer icon and click See what s printing or double click the icon of the printer driver for the machine 2 Select the document you want to cancel and click Document Cancel A Are you sure vou want to cancel the document E Printing of the selected document is canceled NOTE Several pages may be output after you cancel printing TIPS Canceling from the Remote UI MF212w You can cancel printing from the Job Status page on the Remote UI Q Checking Current Status of Print Documents Canceling from an application On some applications a screen like shown below appears You can cancel printing by clicking Cancel 12 336 From the Operation Panel Cancel printing using E or B B Press x to Cancel DI oam km If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When El is Pressed Select the document to cancel m Select cancel job OK p Yes p OK Job Status lt Resume gt BJ copy 04 02PM Paus El Printer 04 02PM Pa Mm Use to Cancel lt Print Job Status gt OK Select the document on the lt Print Job Status gt screen ox Cancel ital Yes p Print Job status Resume lt Cance gt Copy 10 004M Copy gt Job Number 0013 fH Pr
19. Auto Detect Select whether to automatically detect or manually select the communication mode and the Ethernet type 3 Configuring Ethernet Settings Off Communication Mode Half Duplex t Full Duplex Ethernet Type 1O0BASE Tt 100BASE TX MAC Address 225 336 Check the MAC address of the machine which is a number unique to each communication device Viewing the MAC Address Select to return the Network Settings to the factory defaults Initialize System Management Settings 226 336 OL40 07E Output Report You can check the list of the settings as well as the content that has been registered in the machine by printing a User Data List Output Reports NOTE Reports or lists can be printed on A4 or Letter size paper Loading Paper EJ Output Report p User Data List p Check that the size of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine p lt Yes gt p Example rriaiicikzizifiikkkisSkddgprzERREN oe User Data List aud CET TCP PRET ELT CETL Ee S Rom Controller Voreion Boot Rom main Controller PEON Device Configuration Wemory Capacity Serial Number l Network Settings Select Wired Wireless LAN TOP IP Settings IPv 4 Settings IP Address Settings Aute Acquire Select Protocol iF 227 336 OL40 072 Preferences All the settings about the display are listed with short descriptions Default settings are marked with a dagger t NOTE If a
20. Customize W pou werd x impor scared data fo peer rranpulin iough lisa rete ung a ian aper aon paese click ha sc aesti nare robe bos and sees ches DE hours this ubl solves ME T ookbas must be mission pra comple Up to ten computers can be connected at a time on a network to one product scanner 114 336 0L40 04J Scanning from the Machine The sequence of scanning a document and saving it to a computer can only be done when scanning from the machine Scan while specifying what computer documents will be saved to whether to scan documents in color or black and white whether to save documents as PDFs or JPEGs and other settings 1 Place the document s Placing Documents 2 Press ll COPY SCAN to switch to the Scan mode screen 3 Press A Select the scan type Computer 4 Use A W to select the destination computer and press JA This screen is not displayed if only a computer is connected to the machine via USB D Select the scan type Select Scan Type Scan Press OK Scan type Color Resolution File format Color Scan Color 300 dpi PDF searchable 1 High compression B amp W Scan Black and white 300 dpi TIFF lt Custom 1 gt Color 300 dpi JPEG Exif lt Custom 2 gt Color 300 dpi PDF searchable Standard compression 1 A PDF format where characters on the document are scanned as text data and the text can be searched using a computer 2 Document
21. Exi Diver Canon MF PunberCanan MF mm XPS Dureert anon MF PS Fax Lanon MF Dier Canon MF Pot CHMFNFSCAN_F4813976930 Scanner Caron MF F4E133783A 30 Diver Canon MF m Installation of the drivers starts 1O click Exit In Windows Server 2003 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 MF Toolbox is not installed Proceed to step 13 11 click start Welcome to the Setup Wizard for MF Toolbox This Wizerd will mstall MF Toolbox on your computer To start netalling click Start u Installation of MF Toolbox starts 12 Click Exit 1 3 Follow the on screen instructions to install Toner Status Start instalation of Toner Statue 1 4 Follow the on screen instructions to install the e Manual 12 41 1 5 Read the information in the following screen carefully select Accept or Do Not Accept and click Next u Canon Laser Printer Scanner Fax Extended Survey Program EX i For the development and marketryg of products that better meet customer needs Canon requests that the information below related ta your Canon product be ent via he Inbemet te Canon ar in the cass Pal yau are using a Canon product in Chins to the legally apongved research company a Information related to Canon laser printer fax Pringer s ID number instalation date and sme tener use informabon number of sheets printed and maintenance information Tf your Canon product i shared for use co
22. Haevy 2 120 163 g Bond 1 60 90 g m Bond 2 90 120 g m Bond 3 120 163 g Transparency Labels TIPS When a frequently used paper size is known You can set the machine to display only frequently used paper sizes in the selection screen Press ff Paper Setting 2 Select Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes and press OK 3 Select Multi Purpose Tray or Drawer 1 and press R3 45 336 4 Select a frequently used paper size and press g to checkmark it NOTE Uncheckmarked paper sizes are displayed in the lt Other Sizes gt screen D Select Apply and press 3 LINKS Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer Paper 46 336 OL40 011 Registering a Custom Paper Size You can register one frequently used custom paper size each for the paper drawer and manual feed slot 1 Press 3 Paper Setting 2 Use A W to select MP Tray or Drawer 1 gt and press JA sale ect Frequently Us 3 Select Custom and press JJ Paper Size Custom 4 Specify the paper size 1 Specify the length of the lt X gt shorter side Select lt X gt and press E a Input the length of the X side using A W with 44 li to move the cursor between the digits for inputting whole numbers and fractions and press A 77 MS 2 Specify the length of the Y longer side Select Y and press Ej Input the length of the Y side and pre
23. Heavy 2 120 163 g m 60 to 90 g m Bond 1 60 90 g m Bond paper 90 to 120 g m Bond 2 90 120 g m 120 to 163 g m Bond 3 120 163 g m Envelope Envelope Transparency Transparency Label Labels If set to Plain and that printout is curled specify Plain L and print again IMPORTANT Do not use the following types of paper Wrinkled or creased paper Curled or rolled paper Torn paper Damp paper Very thin paper Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer Highly textured paper Glossy paper Paper handling and storage Store the paper on a flat surface Keep the paper wrapped in its original package to protect the paper from moisture or dryness Do not store the paper in such a way that may cause it to curl or fold Do not store the paper vertically or stack too much paper 35 336 Do not store the paper in direct sunlight or in a place subject to high humidity dryness or drastic changes in temperature or humidity NOTE When printing on paper that has absorbed moisture Steam may emit from the paper output area or water droplets may form on the back side of the operation panel or around the paper output area There is nothing unusual about any of these occurrences which occur when the heat generated from fixing toner on the paper causes moisture in the paper to evaporate most likely to occur at low room temperatures LI
24. MF212w MF211 1 336 Important Safety Instructions Installation Power Supply Handling Maintenance and Inspections Consumables Basic Operations Parts and Their Functions Front Side Back Side Interior Manual Feed Slot Paper Drawer Operation Panel Display Using the Operation Panel Entering Text Placing Documents Loading Paper Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot Loading Envelopes Loading Preprinted Paper Specifying Paper Size and Type Registering a Custom Paper Size Entering Quiet Mode Entering Sleep Mode Setting Auto Shutdown Time Copying Basic Copy Operations Canceling Copies Various Copy Settings Enlarging or Reducing Selecting Document Type Adjusting Density Adjusting Sharpness Copving Multiple Documents onto One Sheet 2 on 1 4 on 1 Using the Paper Save Co Key MF211 Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page Collating Copies by Page Changing Default Settings Using the Machine as a Printer Printing from a Computer Printing a Document Canceling Prints Checking the Printing Status Various Print Settings Enlarging or Reducing Collating Printouts by Page 2 336 N OC 12 13 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 27 30 32 34 35 37 40 42 44 45 47 49 51 52 53 54 56 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 72 74 75 76 78 Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet 79 Printing Posters 80 Printing Borders 81 Printing
25. NOTE Icons in the description Problem with the wireless LAN connection Problem with the wired LAN connection Problem with the USB connection The machine cannot be connected to a computer via a wireless LAN a wired LAN and a USB cable at the same time Eie a All three connection types cannot be used at the same time The following can be used at the same time a USB cable and a wired LAN or a USB cable and a wireless LAN Remote UI is not displayed zr a Are Use HTTP and Use Remote UI set to On Disabling HTTP Communication Q Disabling Remote UI If the machine is connected to a wired LAN check that the cable is connected firmly and the IP address is set correctly and then start the Remote UI again For how to check see Getting Started Manuals Included with the Machine or Viewing Network Settings If the machine is connected to a wireless LAN check that the settings are specified correctly and then start the Remote UI again For how to check see Getting Started Manuals Included with the Machine or Connecting to a Wireless LAN A connection to a network cannot be established 3 a The IP address may not be set correctly Set the IP address again Setting IP Addresses When you connect the machine to a computer via wireless LAN check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network When the machine cannot connect to the wireless LAN You are unsure o
26. Select the border type Preview Displays a preview with the selected border LINKS Printing a Document Printing Dates and Page Numbers Printing Watermarks 81 336 OL40 03Y Printing Dates and Page Numbers You can print the information such as dates or page numbers and you can specify where to print this information on the document upper left lower right etc Page Setup tab Click Page Options Select the print position of the print date user name or page number OK OK Print Date Specify the position to print the print date Print User Name Specify the position to print the user name logon name for the computer used to print the document A Print Page Number Specify the position to print the page number Changing the Print Format of Dates and Page Numbers You can change formatting details such as font and font size when printing dates logon names or page numbers Click Format Settings on the Page Options screen shown above to specify the details LINKS Printing a Document Q Printing Borders Q Printing Watermarks 82 336 0LA40 040 Printing Watermarks You can print watermarks such as COPY or CONFIDENTIAL over the document You can create new watermarks or use pre registered watermarks Watermark Watermark Name Select the Watermark check box to display the list of the watermarks in the Wa
27. Specifying Paper Size and Type M Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes You can set the machine to display only frequently used paper sizes in the selection screen Menu Screen When you press E the Menu screen is displayed On this screen you can start specifying general machine settings such as Preferences or Timer Settings as well as many of the settings for each function such as copy and scan Network Settings Output Reports Preferences Timer Settings Copy Settings Scan Settings Printer Settings Adjustment Maintena System Management S Initialize Menu QSetting Menu List Status Monitor Screen When you press a a screen is displayed that enables you to check the status of documents that are being printed or copied as well as the status of the machine such as the toner levels or type of loaded paper Status Monitor Error Information N Device Status Copy Job status il Print Job status l Network Tail e 27 336 Error Information Notification gt Displays the details of any errors that occurred When an Error Message Appears Error Info Notif Check Recovery steps M Device Status Displays the status of the machine such as the amount of paper or toner remaining Device Status Paper Information Cartridge Level Check Counter version Information Serial Number Paper Information Displays whether paper is loaded in each pa
28. UJ Tap lt PDL Selection Plug and Play gt Tap lt Network gt or lt USB gt D D Select the driver you are using UFRII LT UFRIT LT XPS UFRII LT XPS Selectable page description language Fax Network UFRII LT UFRII LT XPS UFRII LT EE UFRII LT XPS 6 Restart the machine If you selected USB in step 4 turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON Using a Model without a Fax Function 1 Press fj 2 Use A W to select System Management Settings and press 3 If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press OK Setting the System Manager PIN e Manual 3 Use A W to select lt PDL Selection Plug and Play and press 53 6 47 4 Use A W to select Network or lt USB gt and press 53 D Use A W to select the driver you are using and press 53 Network USB UFRII LT UFRII LT UFRII LT XPS UFRII LT XPS Selectable page description language NEO UFRII LT UFRII LT XPS USB UFRII LT UFRII LT XPS 6 Restart the machine If you selected USB in step 4 turn OFF the machine and wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it back ON 71 41 0L90 002 Installing This section explains how to install the MF Drivers and MF Toolbox so the machine is ready to print from a computer llInstalling from the Supplied CD ROM DVD ROM Install the MF Drivers and MF
29. and press n3 Select Shortcut Key Settings Register Select shortcut key and press n3 Select the key to which you want to register settings e If you are using the MF211 simply press R3 KR U N mL Select Shortcut Key Scan b PC2 D Select the type of connection that is used between the machine and computer and press n3 destination ofr 117 336 Select this setting to erase registered settings USB Connection Select this setting if the machine and computer are connected via USB Network Connection MF212w Select this setting if the machine and computer are connected via a network 6 Select the destination computer and press A This screen is not displayed if you select USB Connection in step 5 Color scan B W Scan Custom 1 Custom 2 Scan type Color Resolution File format Color Scan Color 300 dpi PDF searchable 1 High compression B amp W Scan Black and white 300 dpi TIFF Custom 1 Color 300 dpi JPEG Exif Custom 2 Color 300 dpi PDF searchable 1 Standard compression 1A PDF format where characters on the document are scanned as text data and the text can be searched using a computer 2 Documents are scanned in black and white only with no intermediate shades of gray NOTE To change settings You can change settings from MF Toolbox Configuring Scan Settings in MF Toolbox ll Checking the Registered Settings n a Settings g
30. double click Device Manager 46 47 0L90 010 Notice B Disclaimers The information in this document is subject to change without notice CANON INC MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THEREOF WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON INFRINGEMENT CANON INC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL li Copyright Copyright CANON INC 2014 No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of Canon Inc il Trademarks Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows Server and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries All other product and brand names are registered trademarks trademarks or service marks of their respective owners 41 41
31. for CA certificates 4 Click Register Key and Certificate or Register CA Certificate Tare Tn y nen aam a area anum San wh rae a Key amu Caries Partien Mey aral iria RD NOTE Deleting a registered key pair or CA certificate Click Delete on the right of the key pair or CA certificate you want to delete click OK You cannot delete the preinstalled CA certificates s TLS is displayed for a currently used key pair and the key pair cannot be deleted In this case disable the function or replace the key pair before deleting it Disabling or enabling the preinstalled CA certificates 108 336 Click Disable on the right of the preinstalled CA certificate you want to disable To enable the certificate again click Enable on the right of the certificate D Click Install Si eye eiue Yared aig erar hy Seep a Wary acl Cette ete c lege Wan acl Corran NOTE Deleting a key pair or CA certificate Click Delete on the right of the file you want to delete and then click OK 6 Click Choose File specify the file to install and click Start Installation Sarre Tan nee aun Rh sl Yara E ou as ery rae m ey dud Corti fatis r LL rd My dud Conica Gretel Kung acci Cerita lrtaE key ered Car ificatm Seely mee en pah al boe inp acid cereos la Fea ikk Mere in rela a Fi a The key pair or CA certificate is installed in the machine Register the key pair or CA certifi
32. intermediate shades of gray similar to a black and white photograph M Select Purpose Select a setting based on your intended use of the scanned image Print 300dpi Select when printing the scanned image Image Display 150dpi Select when displaying the scanned image on a computer 133 336 OCR 300dpi Select when using the scanned image with OCR optical character recognition software Output Size Select the size of the scanned image when it is printed or displayed on a computer For example if you want to output an image that is appropriate for printing on A4 paper select A4 and Print 300dpi for Select Purpose M Click ii to switch between the portrait and landscape orientation This button is not available when Flexible is selected If you select Add Delete you can add new output size settings and delete the added sizes Luigi Pace Let hipu ps Mame Sag mme Wii 1Sz 4 Fa I b Uri rmm Select Flexible to change the ratio of width to height Drag the area you want to scan on the preview image M Image Correction Select the Fading Correction check box to correct faded colors on an old photograph or other images into vivid colors This setting is available when a preview image is displayed and you select Photo Color Platen Glass or Magazine Color Platen Glass for Select Source 13 LINKS Configuring Scan Settings in Advanced Mode Q Scanni
33. t Nebonnrl Riida UFRIILT Ha HTML Aclic tnsr k 9 ams State H mana 40 7 KH Q Click Next 9 Read the License Agreement and click Yes to agree Looe Agnes eae bonnie a Coetu Dick aia apn m m a DANO SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT lis syeement Agmamgni i ehe kg leee areal ia SOE TAARE for Canon caning machines pried and inlifuncbenal Digha jhe Products PEA RR DESCRISE IH THS MGREEMENT BERIRE IMSTAL LING THE SCE TWARE BY CUEING THE BUTTON INDICATIMS YOUR ACCEPTANCE AS STATED BELOW OA INSTALLING Da pew agni bo fhe beran i bere gee 1 0 Select the connection method with the computer USB Connection Select USB Connection and click Next Select the Type of Connection Select the type of cannection between the device and your computer O Network Connection for Nebwork Models u Installation of the drivers starts Proceed to step 17 Wired Wireless LAN Connection Select Network Connection and click Next 21 47 Select the Type of Connection Select the type of connection bebveen the device and your computer To use thas program you must remove all frrewall blocks set against ie ths program Da you want to change the Windows Firewall settings so that the Windows Firewall block will be removed To make this setting effectrve tis also necessary to allow exceptions in Windows Firewall ee ow In Server 2003 Server 2
34. 185 336 0L40 05W Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network When a network is designed to enjoy redundant connectivity with multiple switching hubs or bridges it must have a mechanism to prevent packets from looping One effective solution is to define the role of each switch port However communication may still be disrupted for several tens of seconds immediately after you change the way that network devices are connected or if you add a new device If this type of problem occurs set a wait time for connecting to the network 1 Press ij 2 Use A W to select Network Settings and press J If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press E93 Q Setting the System Manager PIN CJ Select Waiting Time for Connection at Startup gt and press EA 4 Enter the wait time in seconds and press JA a Use AJ W or the numeric keys to enter the time Wait Time for Connect BEN o 0 sec 0 300 D Press f LINKS Configuring Ethernet Settings Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit 186 336 OL40 05X Configuring DNS DNS Domain Name System provides a service for name resolution that associates a host or domain name with an IP address Configure the DNS mDNS or DHCP option settings as necessary Note that the procedures for configuring DNS are different for IPv4 and IPv6 example com IP 182 168 XX X XX X 1 Start the Remot
35. 2 Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions Off Ont RAW Print Settings Enable or disable RAW a Windows specific printing protocol Q Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions Off Ont WSD Settings Enable or disable automatic browsing and acquiring information for the printer or scanner by using the WSD protocol that is available on Windows Vista 7 8 8 1 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions WSD Print Settings Use WSD Print Off Ont Use WSD Browsing Off Ont WSD Scan Settings Use WSD Scan Offt On Use Computer Scan Offt On Use Multicast Discovery Off Ont 223 336 Use HTTP Enable or disable HTTP which is required for communications with a computer such as when using the Remote UI or WSD printing QDisabling HTTP Communication Off Ont Port Number Settings Change port numbers for protocols according to the network environment Changing Port Numbers MF212w LPD 1 to 515T to 65535 RAW 1 to 9100 to 65535 WSD Multicast Discovery 1 to 5 027 to 65535 HTTP 1 to 80t to 65535 SNMP 1 to 161t to 65535 MTU Size Select the maximum size of packets the machine sends or receives Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit SNMP Settings Specify the settings for monitoring and controlling the machine from a computer running SNMP compatible software Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP SNMPv1 Set
36. 3 Q Registering Frequently Used Settings Click Preferences to configure various settings including the operation when scanning Il Preview Tab Configure the preview and auto crop operations AK Ema Bute Cexpesng cn Prreaneari razas E Dispisy the Lars Frames ae Peesisesendd angea P Preview at the Start of ScanGear Select the preview operation when you start ScanGear MF Automatically Execute Preview Scanning of the preview image starts automatically when you start ScanGear MF 140 336 Display Saved Preview Image Preview does not start automatically and the most recently saved preview image is displayed None Preview does not start automatically and no preview image is displayed Cropping Frame on Previewed Images Select how the cropping frame Operating Preview Images is displayed on the preview image Execute Auto Cropping on Previewed Images Auto Crop is performed based on the scanned document Display the Last Frame on Previewed Images Auto Crop is not performed and the most recently set cropping frame is displayed None Auto Crop is not performed and no cropping frame is displayed iB Scan Tab Configure the settings that are applied when you scan a document by using an application and the settings for ScanGear MF operations Scan mi Using Scam wenr s Window Coles Mes Tad arii Tables Tei Enhanced J our Ck Soedbeer after Soa S
37. LINKS Basic Copy Operations 65 336 OL40 01W Collating Copies by Page When preparing multiple copies of multi page documents set lt Collate gt to lt On gt to collate copies in sequential page order This function is useful when preparing handouts for meetings or presentations oft The copies are grouped by page and not collated For example if you are making three copies of a five page document the printouts will be arranged in the following page order 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 On The copies are grouped into complete sets in sequential page order For example if you are making three copies of a five page document the printouts will be arranged in the following page order 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 LINKS Basic Copy Operations 66 336 OL40 01X Changing Default Settings The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine or when you press EA If you change these default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently you can eliminate the need to configure the same settings every time you make copies Copy Settings p Change Default Settings OK Select the setting OK Change the default value of the selected item Apply etal gt Change Default Set No of Copies 1 Density 0 Original Type Text Copy Ratio 100 1 N on 1 Off Coll
38. Network discovery select Turn on network discovery Windows 7 Server 2008 R2 Start select Control Panel View network status and tasks Change advanced sharing settings under Network discovery select Turn on network discovery Windows 8 Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen select Control Panel View network status and tasks Change advanced sharing settings under Network discovery select Turn on network discovery Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 Right click Start select Control Panel View network status and tasks Change advanced sharing settings under Network discovery select Turn on network discovery Windows Server 2008 Start select Control Panel double click Network and Sharing Center under Network discovery select Turn on network discovery WE Displaying the CD ROM DVD ROM Setup Screen If your computer does not display the CD ROM DVD ROM Setup screen after you insert the CD ROM DVD ROM follow the procedure below This following example uses D as the name of the CD ROM DVD ROM drive The CD ROM DVD ROM drive name may be different on your computer Windows XP Server 2003 Start select Run enter D MMInst exe click OK Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Start enter D MInst exe in Search programs and files or Start Search press the ENTER key on the keyboard 44 47 Windows 8 Se
39. Paper llSupported Paper Sizes Paper sizes that can be loaded in the paper drawer and the manual feed slot are listed below A4 210 x 297 mm B5 182 x 257 mm A5 148 x 210 mm Legal 216 x 356 mm Letter 216 x 279 mm Statement 140 x 216 mm Executive 184 0 x 266 7 mm Officio 216 x 318 mm B officio 216 x 355 mm M officio 216 x 341 mm Government Letter 203 x 267 mm Government Legal 203 x 330 mm Foolscap 216 x 330 mm Australian foolscap 206 x 338 mm Indian Legal 215 x 345 mm Envelope COM10 104 7 x 241 3 mm Envelope Monarch 98 4 x 190 5 mm 1 Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm Index Card 76 x 127 mm 1 Custom Paper Size 1 You can load Envelope Monarch and Index Card only in the manual feed slot 0LA40 09F 2 Custom paper size of 76 2 to 216 0 mm in width and 210 to 356 mm in length can be loaded in the paper drawer Custom paper size of 76 2 to 216 0 mm in width and 127 to 356 0 mm in length can be loaded in the manual feed slot NOTE The default paper size of the machine is set to A4 Change the paper size setting when using a different size of paper Specifying Paper Size and Type M Paper Type and Paper Source Capacity Chlorine free paper can be used with this machine Paper Type 60 to 80 g m Plain paper 80 to 90 g m 90 to 105 g m Heavy paper 105 to 163 g m Paper Capacity for Paper Drawer 250 sheets 170 sheets 170 sheets 100
40. Start Computer select Network Windows 8 Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen File Explorer select Network Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 Right click Start File Explorer select Network 2 Right click the newly added printer icon and click Install Hatwork and Sharing Carter Adda printer Addl a vealed divizi z Gi e 0 394 1 aA amp Hi3 wl Homegroup I Computer Vig Hirtwork Canon MFD Saee Categone Pgitrfuncban Desne j Hiean Inr abr Metan 4 Dis med Printers Add s deco Add s ponder Devices i1 Printers and Fares 3 NOTE Deleting unneeded printer icons When you have finished installing the network printer the icon added in step 13 of Installing the MF Drivers is no longer needed To delete the icon right click it and select Remove device or Delete click Yes 30 47 31 47 0L90 00C Uninstalling When you no longer need installed MF Drivers MF Toolbox or the Product Extended Survey Program you can uninstall them to delete them from your computer GUninstalling the MF Drivers Uninstalling the MF Toolbox GUninstalling the Product Extended Survey Program Uninstalling the Toner Status Uninstalling the MF Drivers 1 Log on to the computer with an administrator account 2 Display Programs and Features or Add or Remove Programs QGbisplaying Programs and Features or Add or Remove Programs 3
41. Turpagun Semen fa HE b chick OK O mm Contents Chapter icons and topic titles are displayed in this tab oO The Contents tab can be widened and narrowed Expand All Collapse All Click Expand All to display all of the subsections of all topics Click Collapse All to close all of the subsections of all the topics M Chapter icons Click a chapter icon to navigate to the top of the corresponding chapter Topics Displays the topics of the selected chapter If is displayed on a topic clicking it displays the subsections of that topic Click to close an expanded topic Print all All pages of the selected chapter are opened in a separate window You can print them as necessary t Navigation This shows which chapter topic you are currently viewing 0B Click to return to the page top O0 lt gt Click to display the previous or next topic eo Click to jump to the corresponding page To return to the previous page click the Back button on your Web browser Click to display hidden detailed descriptions Click again to close the detailed descriptions Search Tab This tab contains a text box to perform a search and find the page you are looking for 40 47 Case sanctive Q Search with there conditters Result 2 temia Installing Drewtalling rear the Supplied Ci EDM DATID ROM 0 Abe Connecting the machine and a computer vis a cable ms
42. Yes and press EJA Do you want to Connecting connect using new Cancel Press Stop settings NOTE If an error message is displayed during setup Press ok check whether the network key is correct and return to step 5 T 0 Check that the Wi Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel The Wi Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected When the setup is completed the screen below is displayed and approximately 2 seconds later the Wi Fi indicator lights up a Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed IMPORTANT Signal strength When more than one wireless router is available for connection the machine connects to the device with the strongest signal Signal strength is measured using RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication NOTE Reducing power consumption You can set the machine to enter Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless router Power Save Mode If the IP address of the machine has changed In a DHCP environment the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically If this happens the connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet LINKS 2 Connecting to a Wireless LAN 157 336 OL40 058 Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings If you want to specify the security settings in detail or cannot establish the wireless connection using th
43. cannot be entered Prefix Length Enter a number that indicates how many bits are available for the network address Default Router Address Specify the IPv6 address of the default router as necessary Addresses that start with ff or multicast address cannot be entered Use DHCPv6 Select the check box when using a stateful address When not using DHCPv6 clear the check box 6 Click OK 4 COL doe DELL srat ibiri Pe idi Yes o Fase s Tess Hip merge Reeastabos Te bee Gema hak fetus gt TOR piga gt Dd Dd meh 6 her fatig pe Canna ha aniio cech Ere En Carrertea ts the rece wang erede L ray rot bx abe to be exiabiabed fer chore OR Inm Be Po Fumation riagi diis pad Farid curas ee 1 ne c Pese tam reien Hemara Salir D Sgrkrs RAnnagerment oue Fh Bi reek ridge Lees Lent ty are E sety Seres sirven edam DR 0 red D A T dd D NOTE Checking whether the settings are correct 167 336 Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer by using the IPv6 address of the machine Starting Remote UI Using the operation panel IPv6 settings can also be accessed from Menu screen IPv6 Settings LINKS Q Setting IPv4 Address Q Viewing Network Settings 168 336 0LA40 05F Viewing Network Settings Q Viewing IPv4 Settings 2 Viewing IPv6 Settings Q Viewing the MAC Address Q Viewing Wireless LAN Settings and Information NOTE amp The IP address is n
44. is displayed Black point Eyedropper Mid point Eyedropper White point Eyedropper Click the parts on the preview image or cropping frame you want to specify as the darkest the medium and the brightest Slide ai or Alternatively you can enter a value Gray Balance Eyedropper Tool Click a part on the preview image or cropping frame you want to render as an achromatic color which is black grey or white each of which does not have color depth Color tone on the rest of the image is adjusted with the clicked part being the average For example if snow on a photograph image is bluish click this part because you essentially want to render this part as white When you click this part the snow is no longer bluish and the entire image is adjusted so that it comes closer to natural colors Click different parts little by little while checking the preview image to produce the optimum color tone Tone Curve Settings one Curve Setting E The tone curve is a curved line that indicates the brightness and contrast levels of the image before and after adjustment Select a registered tone curve to adjust the brightness and contrast levels of the image Channel If you select Color for Color Mode you can adjust the Red Green and Blue color channels separately To adjust all three colors at the same time select Master You can combine the adjustments made in Master and those made
45. o Security iking Resmadbe UT 0 Setting cn e Trae bes had imag s Main Cian Appii Quick Help Commun Problems a When an error message appears a Cannet print documents S E a Cannet connect tha machina tn a netwerkad comparar How to can your documents to a compabar Eme Copyrigh CAMON EAC s uem H um Hote Oie Locations A Canon Click to return to the top page Contents tab Search tab Click to toggle the display between the table of contents and search e Contents The titles of chapters are displayed i Place the mouse pointer over one of the titles and topics of the chapter are displayed on the right Click a topic and its page is displayed Lewes F Importam safety Insira ans fp 22st Operations Going Green and Savir a Copying pai 2 s Lean Fhe Mechine as a Primier Easy on the environment easy on your wallet Lint the Machit anon oan sk MEE E ita TIRES Connecting toa Network Selecting Wired LAN or Wire LAN ao Security Connecting be Wired LAN Configering the Machine for Printing fram 3 Computer Configening the Machina for Your Nebwork Dean j Lising Bembe UT err lamin a Simy Moors Lis 2 Vircaabesdecsvtiiag Seira BP Addresses When an error message appears Cannot print documents af hinini Care connect the machine f a netarkosdi aintenancs cnmeuter Bee Do eran your decurmants b
46. 255 characters The printed application name may be added to the file name The list of the documents currently printing or waiting to be printed is displayed j E Log on to the Remote UI Starting Remote UI Status Monitor Cancel Job Status OL OL ELT irim Tis idi We haa Tehi Hep EHI ar Pe You can delete a document job by clicking Cancel NOTE amp If you logged on in System Manager Mode all the print documents currently printing and waiting to be printed will be listed amp If you entered your user name when you logged on in End User Mode your user name will only be displayed on the documents that you printed amp Click Job Number on the paused documents to display detailed information You can check the user name and the page count of the printed document When an error occurs this page will be displayed by clicking the message displayed under Error Information on Portal Page main page Q Portal Page Main Page j ES Log on to the Remote UI Starting Remote UI Status Monitor Cancel Error Information 214 336 mm EDITUM n ce Te Ww hea Teh Help P sius Blondie ance Giver irabio Fian H b on H bikr Cope DEDM marc 28014 Paper size and type for the paper source serial number for the toner cartridge and other information is displayed dh d Log on to the Remote UI Starting Remote UI Status Monitor Cancel Consuma
47. 4 4 Supported Operating Systems Check the following for MF Driver and MF Toolbox support for each OS C Supported Not supported Windows Windows XP Vista 7 8 8 1 Printer driver UFRII LT O O Printer driver UFRII LT O XPS Fax driver 5 C C Scanner driver C C Network Scan 1 1 Utility O O MF Toolbox C C Toner Status C 8 Address Book Import Export C Tool 5 Canon MF LBP Wireless Setup Assistant 5 Presto x3 PageManager O O 1 Supported only over network connection 2 Supported only with Windows Server 2008 3 Supported only with 32 bit editions 4 Supported only over wireless LAN connection Windows Server 2003 Server 2008 Q Q Q O 5 These software may not be supplied depending on your model or your country or region 5 47 oL90 013 Windows Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 Q O Q O 0L90 011 Selecting the Driver to Be Installed Before installing the MF Drivers on the machine specify the connection method with the computer and the types of drivers to use QUsing a Model with a Fax Function QUsing a Model without a Fax Function Using a Model with a Fax Function 1 Press a and tap Menu Scan BgAddr Book 2 Tap lt System Management Settings gt If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap lt Apply gt Setting the System Manager PIN e Manual
48. 5 EG Malti Hawnhekk CANON INC jiddikjara li AW NM383 jikkonforma mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma dispo izzjonijiet Maltese relevanti o ra tad Direttiva 1999 5 KE Magyar Alul rott CANON INC nyilatkozom hogy a AW NM383 megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az Hungarian 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b el r sainak Polski Polish Niniejszym CANON INC o wiadcza e model AW NM383 jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portugu s Por este documento a CANON INC declara que o AW NM383 est em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais Portuguese e outras disposi es relevantes da Diretiva 1999 5 CE Sloven ina Dru ba CANON INC izjavlja da je tiskalnik AW NM383 skladni z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi Slovenian dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES Slovensky CANON INC t mto vyhlasuje e AW NM383 sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia Smernice Slovak 1999 5 ES Suomi CANON INC vakuuttaa t ten ett AW NM383 laite on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit Finnish koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen Svenska H rmed intygar CANON INC att denna AW NM383 st r i verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav Swedish och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG Rom n Prin prezenta CANON INC declar faptul c aparatul AW NM383 este
49. 7 8 8 1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 0 or later Macintosh Mac OS 10 4 9 or later except for Classic environment Safari 3 2 1 or later 209 336 OL40 06R Starting Remote UI To operate remotely you need to input the IP address of the machine into a Web browser and start the Remote UI Check the IP address set to the machine in advance Viewing Network Settings If you have any questions ask your Network Administrator il Start the Web browser 2 Enter http the IP address of the machine in the address field and press the ENTER key Favorites Tools Help F TS File Edit View If you want to use an IPv6 address enclose the IPv6 address with brackets example http fe80 2e9e fcff fe4e dbce NOTE If a security alert is displayed A security alert may be displayed if communication with an Apple device is encrypted Encrypting Communication of Print Data for Apple Devices with TLS When certificate settings or TLS settings have no errors continue browsing the Web site 3 Log on to the Remote UI m When a System Manager PIN is not set Select System Manager Mode or End User Mode CLIE Fia ldi Yew Paeubn Teh Help Cro Lagin MPELO Sena Pe Sere Oe yir Manager Poe LHi Fera leg In DORPE CAMO PIC 2004 A System Manager Mode You can perform all the Remote UI operations and settings If a System Manger PIN is not set factory default settings you d
50. Assist Service check box 1 3 Select the printer drivers to install and click Next Print Test Page Exit UFRII LT amp PS Printer Driver Confira the fallowina setting deted You can change lhe printer name 1 vou specily thie printer az Select Device shared printer pou can specily the shared prinber name and set Select Driver ari additional diwar allemiate diro 3 Confirm Settings Confirm the settings and then click Next 5 Sat Default Prnt Pr ERT EEEE Pint Tent Page Driver Canon MF eme Ex Printer Name EIEN e Use az Shared Printer Shared Hanne Drivers to Add 23 4 15 16 L7 Settings Cenfim the following setting details Tou can change the fax name IF you specily this lax az a shared fax vau can spacy the shared Fas name and set an additional ceived alteinake ever Contin the settings and then click Mast Fax Pot CHMFNP F48133789A30 Pont Tes Page Ext Fax Name Ed 29 USA Lise as Shared Fax Humber of Devices to Set Bak Meas Cancel Printer Name Fax Name Change the name as necessary Use as Shared Printer Use as Shared Fax Select the check box if you want to share the machine using the computer where you are performing the installation as a print server Setting Up Print Server e Manual Shared Name Change the shared name as necessary Drivers to Add If you have selected the Use as S
51. Common Problems If you suspect that the machine is malfunctioning see the following sections before contacting Canon Common Problems QInstallation Settings Problems Copying Problems Q Printing Problems E Printing Results are Not Satisfactory If printing results are not satisfactory see When You Cannot Print Properly B When a Problem Cannot Be Solved If a problem persists see When a Problem Cannot Be Solved to find out where to contact 251 336 OL40 07F OL40 07H Clearing Jams If a paper jams lt Paper jammed gt is displayed on the screen Press lt Next gt to display simple solutions If it is difficult to understand the procedures on the display see the following sections to clear jams Paper jammed Lift control panel Press gt to display steps IMPORTANT When removing the jammed paper do not turn OFF the machine Turning OFF the machine deletes the data that is being printed If paper tears Remove all the paper fragments to prevent them from becoming jammed If paper jams repeatedly Make sure that the paper and the packing material are completely removed The plastic part is also a packing maternal Be sureto reme it Tap the paper stack on a flat surface to even the edges of the paper before loading it into the machine Check that the paper is appropriate for the machine Paper Check that no jammed paper fragments remain in the machin
52. Delve Res Sten DLL Hi Cheapo a Diline E C benda me feug Loiret a canon DIAS rarest C eo a CAKION TC fe hatari h Morid h Liamatd do ie m 7 Delete ic delete the selected device D Click Yes S The uninstall starts 6 Click Exit Uninstallation of the MF drivers is Click Ext to ad the wizard 1 Log on to the computer with an administrator account 2 Display Programs and Features or Add or Remove Programs Displaying Programs and Features or Add or Remove Programs 33 47 3 Select the MF Toolbox and click Uninstall or Remove QU TR Lond Panel x Programme B Progam wid leten ay acych Progearer coz Feat bis bt ew eo Lip Lanta Fang bioma Uninstall or change a program Wera irgtadad update Te unimzkali a peogearn miei frorn tha fet ard thes click Leueatall Change or aai Ap Tun Wonder Teteres on or ell Publniher 1 Eaton Laser Priester Scanner Fin Extended Sarees Postera CARY ME EB Canon MF Tocibx 3 1 1 m7 CARH TC TG ee Ta Tu ET DUE DCAMONMIHE Pescert versis dAl Jaa ab LEE 1 The uninstaller starts 4 Click Remove 5 Click Restart Uninstalling the Product Extended Survey Program 1 Log on to the computer with an administrator account 2 Display Programs and Features or Add or Remove Programs Displaying Programs and Features or Add or Remove Programs 3 Select Canon Laser Printer Scanner Fax Exte
53. Duplex Alternately sends and receives communication data Select when the machine is connected to a networking device using half duplex M Full Duplex Simultaneously sends and receives communication data Use this setting for most environments 3 Select the Ethernet type Select Ethernet Type p select lt 10BASE T gt or lt 100BASE TX gt p OK f Auto Detect Ethernet Type Apply LOBASE T Comunication Mode 1OOBASE TX Ethernet Type 4 Select lt Apply gt and press n3 D Press fj LINKS 2 Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit 183 336 Q Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network 184 336 OL40 05U Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit In most Ethernet networks the maximum size of a packet that can be sent is 1500 bytes A packet refers to a chunk of data into which the original data is divided before being sent The maximum transmission unit MTU may vary on each network Change the settings of the machine as necessary For more information contact your Network Administrator 1 Press E 2 Use A W to select Network Settings and press J If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press n3 Q Setting the System Manager PIN 3 Select TCP IP Settings MTU Size Z Select the MTU and press 3 D Press j LINKS Q Configuring Ethernet Settings QSetting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network
54. IPv4 Address Filter NOTE Entry form for IP addresses Description IPv4 Delimit numbers with periods Entering a single address IPv6 Delimit alphanumeric characters with colons Specifying a range of Insert a hyphen between the addresses addresses 199 336 IPv6 Address Filter Example 192 169 0 10 fe80 10 IPv4 192 169 0 10 192 168 0 20 IPv6 fe80 10 fe80 20 Specifying a tange lt Enter the address followed by a slash and a number indicating the addresses with fix h fe80 1234 64 a prefix IPv6 pEEIUSCIERIgENS only Deleting an IP address from exceptions Select an IP address and click Delete To enter multiple IP addresses at the same time use a hyphen JP addresses nicduded in bath Allowed Addresses and Blocked A be recognized as blocked addresses j Click OK NOTE You can enable or disable the IP Address Filter settings from Menu IPv4 Address Filter IPv6 Address Filter LINKS QSpecifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules 200 336 OL40 065 Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules You can limit communication to only devices with specified MAC addresses or block devices with specified MAC addresses but permit other communications Up to 10 MAC addresses can be specified IMPORTANT This function is unavailable when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode Starting Remote UI 2 Cl
55. MIB Access Permission For each community select Read Write or Read Only for the access privileges to MIB objects Read Write Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects Read Only Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects Use Dedicated Community Dedicated Community is a preset community intended exclusively for Administrators using Canon software Select the check box to use Dedicated Community If you do not need to use Dedicated Community clear the check box BEnabling SNMPv1 E4 1 Select the Use SNMPv1 check box 2 Select the Use Community Name 1 or Use Community Name 2 check box enter the community name in the Community Name text box and specify the MIB Access Permission setting Up to two community names can be registered 3 Select the Use Dedicated Community check box and specify the MIB Access Permission setting m Disabling SNMPv1 Clear the Use SNMPv1 check box 192 336 6 Specify Printer Management Information Acquisition Settings With SNMP the printer management information such as printing protocols and printer ports can be monitored and obtained regularly from a computer on the network Vili doram Pyriramen Feni ergy ce IL REL ins commen awe Fili dcxess Peer en w Oriented ormana Srbtings x Lise Dedecatied Cosas FER Acres Pee id izl Cori CAO IC 28146 Acquire Printer Management Information from Host Select the check box to enable
56. Network Q Viewing Network Settings ll Configuring or Preparing for Print Scan Functions LIAE Configuring the Machine for Printing from a Computer lli Customizing the Machine for More Convenient Network Experience Q Configuring the Machine for Your Network Environment 145 336 OL40 051 Connecting to a Network When connecting the machine to a wired or wireless local area network LAN you need to set an IP address unique to the selected network Select wired or wireless depending on your communication environment and networking devices For steps to connect the machine and set an IP address see Getting Started Manuals Included with the Machine For specific IP address settings contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator IMPORTANT If the machine is connected to an unsecured network your personal information might be leaked to a third party NOTE The machine cannot connect to both wired and wireless LANs at the same time The machine does not come with a LAN cable or router Have them ready as necessary For more information about your networking devices see the instruction manuals for the devices or contact your manufacturer B Before You Start Follow these steps to connect the machine to a network 1 Le Check your computer settings d Make sure that the computer is correctly connected to the network For more information see the instruction J manual
57. Select the MF Drivers that you want to uninstall and click Uninstall Change or Change Remove ec Ea F Conte Panel e Frege amp Progr and Fastorer bis Et dae coia Hip Lantral Fone Firma Uninstall or change a program Cera iratadiad update Te umimakali a peogearn miet frorn tha iat ard than click Lieuratall Change or ngai m e mA ia rer mmi Cigala s ty Tin Viiart Teaturez cn or ell ia Hd g manm n Fannari ves The uninstaller starts NOTE If you cannot find the drivers that you want to uninstall Start the uninstaller from the User Software and Manuals CD ROM DVD ROM or from the MF Drivers file that you downloaded 1 Insert the User Software and Manuals CD ROM DVD ROM into the drive on the computer s To start the uninstaller from the MF Drivers file that you downloaded carry out the following step 2 Open the folder where the uninstaller is stored 32 bit operating system us eng or uk eng 32bit misc folders of the CD ROM DVD ROM or downloaded file 64 bit operating system us eng or uk eng x64 misc folders of the CD ROM DVD ROM or downloaded file NOTE If you do not know whether to specify the 32 bit version or the 64 bit version for Windows Vista 7 8 8 1 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 see 2 Checking the Bit Architecture 3 Double click DelDrv exe 32 47 Die f Eu osian mhna bap EDI il Hosen um Lui
58. Server 178 336 OL40 05L Setting Up Print Server With a print server you can reduce the load on the computer that you print from The print server also enables each computer to install MF Drivers over the network which saves you the trouble of installing the drivers on each computer by using the DVD ROM To set up a computer on the network as a print server configure the settings for sharing the printer IMPORTANT To perform the following procedure log on to your computer with an administrator account You may be unable to install drivers over the network depending on the operating system and the bit architecture 32 bit or 64 bit of the print server and client computers When implementing a print server in a domain environment consult your Network Administrator NOTE To obtain device information when using a print server Canon Driver Information Assist Service must be added during the printer driver installation MF Driver Installation Guide 1 Open the printer folder Displaying the Printer Folder 2 Right click your printer icon and click Printer properties or Properties c Fide rk Wie Tods Help Add a doce Add a ponitur Sun what s paran Manage defekt prir ars Devices 2 a Printers and Faxes 3 Canon MEJLO Series State UD Deish Category Printer Hadek Canen MEZ2IO Seneca Statue D decumas Gave Ez ete a Color Management Securty Poli Eygu shane this prste only urag an your netw
59. Setting the System Manager PIN 3 Select TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings PING Command 4 Enter the IPv4 address of another device on the network and press Eg Received response from host If a proper connection has been established the result is displayed as shown above LINKS Setting IPv6 Addresses Q Viewing Network Settings 165 336 OL40 05E Setting IPv6 Addresses 2 P Type Link local address Manual address Stateless address Stateful address The IPv6 addresses of the machine can be configured via the Remote UI Before setting IPv6 addresses check the IPv4 address settings Viewing IPv4 Settings You need to set the correct IPv4 settings to use IPv6 addresses Note that the scan function that uses the scanner driver or MF Toolbox is not available in an IPv6 environment The machine can use up to nine of the following IPv6 addresses Maximum number Description available An address that is only valid within a subnet or link and cannot be used to communicate with 1 devices beyond a router A link local address is automatically set when the IPv6 function of the machine is enabled 1 An address that is entered manually When using this address specify the prefix length and default router address An address that is generated automatically using the MAC address of the machine and the 6 network prefix that is advertised by the router Stateless addresses are discarded whe
60. Special Mode K gt p lt On gt m gt 0 NOTE When set to lt On gt Print speed is slower Clean the fixing assembly after a toner cartridge is replaced or if black streaks appear on printouts Fixing Assembly 243 336 0LA40 07A System Management Settings All the settings about System Management Settings are listed with short descriptions Default settings Printer Settings are marked with a dagger t Adjustment Maintena system Management Se Imitial1ze Menu NOTE Asterisks Settings marked with 1 are only available for the MF212w amp Settings marked with 2 have different defaults depending on the country or region of purchase Network Settings Q System Manager Information Settings Device Information Settings Q Security Settings Q Select Country Region OG Remote UI Settings Auto Online for Remote Scan QQUse as USB Device Q Enable Product Extended Survey Program Q Displ Consmbls Info RUI Toner Status PDL Selection Plug and Play Update Firmware Olnitialize System Management Settings Olnitialize All Data Settings See Network Settings MF212w Specify the PIN exclusively for Administrators who have access privileges to lt Network Settings gt and lt System Management Settings gt You can set the PIN from lt System Manager PIN gt You can also register the name of an Administrator Setting the System Manager PIN System Manager PIN En
61. Start select Control Panel Printers and Other Hardware Printers and Faxes Windows Vista Start select Control Panel Printer Windows 7 Server 2008 R2 Start select Devices and Printers Windows Server 2008 Start select Control Panel double click Printers Windows 8 Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen select Control Panel View devices and printers Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 Right click Start select Control Panel View devices and printers ll Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server 1 Open Windows Explorer Windows XP Vista 7 Server 2003 Server 2003 R2 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Start select All Programs or Programs Accessories Windows Explorer Windows 8 Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen select File Explorer Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 Right click Start select File Explorer 2 Select Network or My Network Places and double click the computer set up as a print server To view computers on the network you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for computers a Check if your shared printer is displayed GoOo Mehecrk t MOO A a Urngseipe Vetwepik arid Shaiag Center Vaca CSTE pae Yr Favarbes WB Ceep x Dewnlkcariu E Recent Places Shand Pontm 2 d Libraries Documents a Munk fee PEED H Vid ena 9E Computer amp loci fii am Ri
62. TE eno AA Hapan Senge herari ema zw DELL iat hatter amas AT Soe Satie HPF tke eked Piet Tibagi Base Trek lur merui ot rte hese Dernier edis Werk LA Sapari Bing Wess Pa mir AA LETE irum 4 Configure printing protocols EConfiguring LPD or RAW 1 Click Edit in LPD Print Settings or RAW Print Settings Tier IL idc PLN eee teed Fie idi Yer haa Tasa Hap 2 Configure the settings as necessary 173 336 E IE LE ESLT D ELL e e eiiiai c F e dt Vers a Teh Heip I SS TI Cro Settings Registration Mei Sper Meer Use LPD Printing Select the check box to print via LPD When not using LPD printing clear the check box Use RAW Printing Select the check box to print via RAW When not using RAW printing clear the check box 3 Click OK m Configuring WSD Click Edit in WSD Settings d 4 Ea itp c SEULS etre pire ig kii Wem han Teh Help Change tha bly cheng Cipare CNET DUET SRI Use WSD Printing Select the check box to print via WSD When not using WSD printing clear the check box Use WSD Browsing Select the check box to obtain information about the machine from a computer via WSD This check box is automatically selected when the Use WSD Printing check box is selected Use WSD Scanning Available for Windows Vista 7 8 8 1 WSD scanning enables you to scan documents to a computer without ins
63. Type The machine is not connected to a network correctly Check the machine and network settings and connect again Connecting to a Network Paper jams Remove the jammed paper or document and print again Printing may resume automatically Q Clearing Jams The network key the WEP key of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly Check the network key the WEP key of the wireless router and set it to the machine again Q Checking the SSID and Network Key Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to Open System Q Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router QSetting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings The authentication method of the machine is set to Shared Key but that of the wireless router is set to Open System Change the WEP authentication method to Shared Key at the wireless router and connect again For more information about how to change see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer The paper size setting on the operation panel does not match the loaded paper size Match the paper size setting specified in Paper Settings and the size of the paper that is actually loaded To use the loaded paper Change the setting of Paper Settings to match the loaded paper size QSpecify
64. Use Authentication When using AirPrint you can use authentication To use authentication select the check box and then specify a User Name Set Change Password Specify a password to use for authentication To specify a password select the check box and then specify the password in Password and Confirm 100 336 LINKS QUsing AirPrint MF212w Q Generating Key Pairs Using CA issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates 101 336 OL40 049 Configuring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certificates In order to encrypt communication with a remote device an encryption key must be sent and received over an unsecured network beforehand This problem is solved by public key cryptography Public key cryptography ensures secure communication by protecting important and valuable information from attacks such as sniffing spoofing and tampering of data as it flows over a network Key Pair b A key pair consists of a public key and a secret key both of which are required for encrypting or decrypting data Because data that has been encrypted with one of the key pair cannot be returned to its original data form without the other public key cryptography ensures secure communication of data over the network Up to three key pairs can be registered Using CA issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates On this machine you can also perform Generate Network Communication Key and Generate Key and Certificate Signing Request CS
65. a password NOTE When Open System is selected When connecting to a wireless LAN the machine experiences an authentication error if the shared key authentication is set on the wireless router If this happens the machine automatically changes the setting to Shared Key and retries the connection j Select Edit WEP Key and press OK 158 336 WEP Select WEP Key 1 Edit WEP Key 4 Select the WEP key 1 to 4 you want to edit and press OK Up to four WEP keys can be registered wP Keyl WEP Key 2 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 4 5 Enter the network key that you have written down Enter the network key using the numeric keys and select Apply and press fs O Entering Text 6 Select Select WEP Key and press R3 Select the WEP key you have edited and press OK BUsing WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK E4 Select lt WPA WPA2 PSK gt and press OK 2 Select an encryption method and press OK Auto Sets the machine to automatically select AES CCMP or TKIP to match the setting of the wireless router lt AES CCMP gt Sets AES CCMP as the encryption method 3 Enter the network key that you have written down Enter the network key using the numeric keys select Apply and press amp j OG Entering Text K 8 64 Char Apply Entry Mode aA 8 Select Yes and press JJ DO you want to connecting connect using new cancel Press Stop setti
66. amp MF212w users If any setting of the Timer Settings is changed from the Remote UI while the machine is in the sleep mode the timer for the Auto Shutdown Time setting is reset to the beginning The machine automatically shuts down after the specified period of idle time has elapsed since the timer was reset 52 336 OL40 019 Copying This chapter describes basic copy operations and various other useful copy functions such as copying several pages onto a single sheet W Using Basic Operations Basic Copy Operations 2 Canceling Copies llUsing Copy Settings to Suit Your Needs Q Enlarging or Reducing Q Collating Copies by Page Hd Adjusting Density Copying Both Sides of an ID Card Using the Paper Save Copy Key onto One Page MF211 Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet 2 on 1 4 on 1 E Simplifying Your Frequent Copy Operations Q Changing Default Settings 93 336 Basic Copy Operations 1 Place the document s Placing Documents d 2 Press ll COPY SCAN to switch to the Copy mode screen 3 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keys Enter a quantity from 1 to 99 Press to cancel the entered quantity Copy Press Start 1006 4 Density 0 Original Type Text Copy Ratio 100 1 4 Specify the copy settings as necessary a Use AJ W to select the settings Various Copy Settings Copy Press Start 100 8 A4 1 Density 0 Original
67. basic setup procedures from removing the Getting Started packing materials to setting up the machine This manual describes all the functions of the machine in a manual that is viewed using a Web browser You can browse information by category or enter e Manual This Manual a keyword to search for pages on a specific topic Using e Manual This manual describes how to install the MF drivers MF Toolbox and the Ao AIMEE TGs TTE I en CEU E supplied software on the User Software and Manuals DVD ROM 312 336 OL40 09U Using e Manual The e Manual is a manual that can be viewed on your computer that describes all of the functions of the machine You can search from your intended use or enter a keyword to quickly find the page you are looking for You can use the e Manual by installing it on your computer or start the e Manual directly from the DVD ROM Installing e Manual How to Find the Topic You Are Looking for You can find the page you are looking for using the following 3 methods Search the contents You can find the page you are looking for by selecting the topic from the Contents tab on the left side of the screen and selecting the Chapter icon next to the topic Top Page Q Topic Page Search by keyword Perform a search by entering a keyword such as copy or wireless LAN and the pages containing the keyword are displayed You can find the page you are looking for from those results You can also enter
68. by pressing of and return to the previous screen by pressing EJ BAdjusting a setting value Use 44 p gt when adjusting the value on a scale Correct Density 000040000 30 336 Using Press E to apply a setting Initialize Using the Numeric Keys Use the numeric keys when entering text and numbers Entering Text a Manager Name Entry Mode aA TIPS You can change a variety of display related settings such as the scrolling speed or display language Q Display Settings To change the screen that is automatically displayed when the machine remains idle for a specified length of time Function After Auto Reset 31 336 0L40 00L Entering Text Use the numeric keys to enter text and values GHI JKL Fi 8 PORS TUV LI 0 4 OK gt e Switching the Type of Text Press to switch the type of text that is entered The currently selected type of text is indicated by the aA or 12 of lt Entry Mode gt Entry Mode aa NOTE You can also select lt Entry Mode gt and press to switch the type of text Types of Text That Can Be Entered The text that can be entered using the numeric keys and are listed below Key aA 12 E 7 1 2 ABC ABCabc 2 3 DEF DEFdef 3 GHIghi 4 id JKLjkl 5 6 MNOmno 6 Fi PQRSpars 7 8 TUM TUVtuv 8 9 WXYZ WXYZwWXyz 9 E Not available 0 3 n SYMBOLS space el pp C SP es OAREN La Not available 32 336
69. ent via fhe Inbemet te Canon ar in the caos Pal yau are using a Canon product in Chins to e legally apongved research company 2 Information related to Canon laser printer fax Pringer s ID number instalation date and sme tener use informabon number of sheets printed and Tf your Canon product i shared for use collective information recorded in the shared product vell be seni In this survey wie wil not pend any other informasen including your personal information For thig reason from the information that is sent to uz we are unable ta identify specie customers lal Vie are therefore unable to respond bo requests Ea eieciose any sent informaben ig After you install the survey program the above information will be sent to Canon in case of using your Canon product in China ta the legally acnroved research company through the Internet every month for ten years The Internet connection fee shal be bome by you Te accept the terms above elect Accept and then dick Mest to start iretallation of thia program u If you select Accept the Product Extended Survey Program is installed The Product Extended Survey Program is a program to send basic information related to installation and usage of the printer to Canon every month for 10 years It does not send any other information including your personal information You can uninstall the Product Extended Survey Program at any time Uninstalling the Product Extend
70. if streaks adhere to the print paper 241 336 53 Adjustment Maintenance p lt Special Processing gt Special Mode D p Select Copy or Print p b On b e E NOTE After the setting is enabled When set to On this setting takes priority over the setting for Special Mode Z gt a While more effect is gained than with Special Mode Z gt print speed is slower After printing from a smartphone or tablet If streaks adhere to the paper change the setting with Special Mode D Copy Special Mode I H Only select On if paper jams frequently when printing on lightweight paper or on curled paper Offt On n aa b lt Special Processing lt Special Mode I gt p lt On gt p g NOTE When set to On White patches may appear in images printed on paper other than lightweight paper Special Mode J H If printing is uneven when printing fine lines or faint images select On Offt On B n as eene b Special Processing Special Mode J On p NOTE When set to On The following may occur Definition may be affected Toner appears in non print areas when using a new toner cartridge Toner may be used up more quickly 242 336 Special Mode K If toner does not adhere adequately and printouts are faded select On Offt On b lt Adjustment Maintenance gt p Special Processing gt
71. in the individual color channels If you select Grayscale for Color Mode only Grayscale is displayed Select Tone Curve Select from the items listed below No Correction Performs no correction Over Exposure Lightens the entire image eee Darkens the entire image High Contrast Emphasizes the difference between the light and dark parts of the image Invert the Negative Positive Inverts the light and dark parts of the image Image Final Review The results of all adjustments made to the brightness contrast 3 histogram 33 and tone 139 336 curve settings 3 are displayed in a tone curve and as numerical values Perform a final check of the color settings Adjust the threshold value for black and white images You can enhance the appearance of text or reduce the visibility of text or images printed on the reverse side of a semi transparent document such as a newspaper The setting is available if you select Black and White for Color Mode The threshold value is the boundary that separates whether a color is rendered as black or white Colors below a certain density level are rendered as white and colors above a certain density level are rendered as black Threshold Level Slide a or enter a value To render more parts as black slide sm to the right or enter a larger value M Registering or Calling Settings Call registered brightness or color settings for to 3 and
72. is performed Select 0 to disable the Auto Reset function The Auto Reset is not performed in the following cases a The setting menu is displayed The machine is processing data such as when printing documents An error message is displayed and the error indicator is blinking However Auto Reset is performed when the error does not prevent the user from continuing to use a function O Auto Reset is disabled 1 to 2t to 9 min m Timer Settings p Auto Reset Time p Set the Auto Reset time p b 5 NOTE The screen displayed after the Auto Reset is performed can be selected in Function After Auto Reset Select whether to return the display to the default screen after the Auto Reset is performed If Default Function is selected the display returns to the main screen for copy mode If Selected Function is selected the display returns to the main screen of the function that was selected Default Function t Selected Function E Timer Settings Function After Auto Reset p Select Default Function or Selected Function b 53 If a key has not been pressed for a specified period of time after the screen below is displayed the machine is set online for scanning the machine automatically becomes offline Specify the time period at which the machine becomes offline You can also set the machine to remain online 233 336 O The machine remains online 1 t
73. management software when installed on a computer on the network enables you to configure monitor and control the machine remotely from the computer For more information see the instruction manuals for your management software 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager mode Starting Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration vu denm Fis L1 Yer ha Teo belo 3 Click Network Settings SNMP Settings hia pate ped Bae eta irk oet Lnd PUE Stee PRI CECI an cu Tang Dans for Laertio iat tartan tee Dover beige Tara LAN eine BE sod Er aigu LA AurPrimd Senge Agr E TEE secun mE Z Click Edit 191 336 a ee CLES re sast srg hin Fia idt Yew P na Teh Hep Oe Settings Registration Primer B Pas bami E pegghory Saec D Fumar iting pem SMP Setting D Copy kraiga n p tatg ES dhru ih immuni some i riina vae Tarama bine hh Cammsrerg kiir pk EI ajos Parri eremia iare J Seii Specify SNMPv1 settings irgo Freier Parepnret hiomaton from kon Use SNMPv1 Select the check box to enable SNMPv1 You can specify the rest of SNMPv1 settings only when this check box is selected Use Community Name 1 Use Community Name 2 Select the check box to specify a community name If you do not need to specify a community name clear the check box Community Name Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the name of the community
74. named with the scanning date is created and the data is saved to that folder amp To change the save destination see 2 Configuring Storing Settings TIPS Scan from the machine more easily If you have regularly used preferences such as scanning in color or black and white or a pre determined computer where scanned documents will be saved specifying these settings each time you scan can be troublesome Register these settings in a Scan PC key so that you can scan with one press of a key Scanning Using the Scan gt PC Key 116 336 0LA40 0A8 Scanning Using the Scan gt PC Key Place a document on the machine and press Or for MF211 Gg and scanning starts immediately The type of scan color or black and white the save destination for the document and other settings can be registered to a button and documents can be scanned using those settings This section describes how to register settings in a button and scan with it Registering Your Settings in the Scan gt PC Key QUsing the Scan gt PC Key NOTE MF211 users The only available shortcut key is Ema The Network Connection option and screen for selecting a destination computer are not displayed Registering Your Settings in the Scan PC Key Register the save destination computer and type of scan in Or for MF211 Ezra lt Scan gt PC1 gt lt Scan gt PC2 gt Press fj Use A W to select Scan Settings
75. need to set MAC Address Filter to Off MAC Address Filter NOTE Deleting a MAC address from exceptions Select a MAC address and click Delete j Click OK NOTE You can enable or disable the IP Address Filter settings from Menu 2MAC Address Filter LINKS Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules 202 336 OL40 066 Changing Port Numbers LEIM Ports serve as endpoints for communicating with other devices Typically conventional port numbers are used for major protocols but devices that use these port numbers are vulnerable to attacks because these port numbers are well known To enhance security your Network Administrator may change the port numbers When a port number has been changed the new number must be shared with the communicating devices such as computers and servers Specify the port number settings depending on the network environment NOTE To change the port number for proxy server see Setting a Proxy MF212w Press E 2 Use A W to select Network Settings and press JJ If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press R3 Q Setting the System Manager PIN 3 Select TCP IP Settings Port Number Settings 4 Select a port and press JA NOTE Learning more about the ports lt LPD gt lt RAW gt lt WSD Multicast Discovery Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions HTTP Disabling HTTP Communicatio
76. on the operating system and the version of the scanner driver or applications you are using the screens in this manual may differ from your screens ll Scanning from the Machine You can scan and save documents to your computer by using the operation panel of the machine Scanning from the Machine ll Scanning from a Computer You can scan documents placed on the machine from a computer The scanned documents are saved to the computer You can scan using MF Toolbox included with the machine or with other applications such as an image processing or word processing application Q Scanning from a Computer ll Scanning with the Canon Mobile Application W zeAPi You can operate a smartphone or tablet to scan an original placed on the machine For more information on this function see the Canon website 113 336 OL40 04H Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner Make sure that the machine and your computer are connected and all software is installed For how to check see Getting Started Manuals Included with the Machine To connect via a wireless or wired LAN you must register this machine in MF Network Scan Utility Register by following the procedure below This procedure is not required if the machine and your computer are connected via USB IMPORTANT The scan function is not available if the machine and your computer are connected in an IPv6 environment Use IPv4 or a USB connection 1 Click 3 in the system tray
77. once Olnitializing System Management Settings Network Settings 1 Use as USB Device System Manager Information Settings Enable Product Extended Survey Program Device Information Settings Displ Consmbls Info RUI Toner Status Security Settings 1 PDL Selection Plug and Play Remote UI Settings 1 Initialize All Auto Online for Remote Scan Delete all data on the machine and return it to its factory default settings m 53 Initialize All Data Settings p lt Yes gt p p lt Yes gt p Restart the machine 249 336 OL40 07C Initialize Menu Y Select to restore the settings listed below to the factory defaults You can restore all the settings listed DD below at once or you can restore individual settings separately Initializing Menu Printer Settings Adjustment Maintena System Management S Initialize Menu NOTE If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press A Setting the System Manager PIN Preferences Timer Settings Copy Settings Scan Settings Printer Settings Adjustment Maintenance Initialize All 250 336 Troubleshooting When a problem occurs check this chapter to find out solutions before contacting Canon E Paper Jams If a document or paper jams see Q Clearing Jams to remove the jammed paper BA Message Appears If the screen displays a message see the following section Qo When an Error Message Appears B
78. or four documents onto a single sheet at a reduced size This decreases the number of pages enabling you to save paper NOTE Using lt 2 on 1 gt lt 4 on 1 gt reduces the copy ratio automatically the copy ratio is displayed on the screen You can increase or further reduce the copy ratio before pressing B but the edges of the document might not be copied if you increase it 2 on 1 gt lt 4 on 1 is not available when using ID Card Copy amp When you copy multiple documents onto one page margins may be created in the copied image mm COPY SCAN lt N on 1 OK Select lt 2 on 1 or 4 on 1 p Select the document size on the Scan Size screen p OK O lt 2 on 1 gt lt 4 on 1 Select 2 on 1 to copy two pages of documents onto a single sheet or select 4 on 1 to copy four pages of documents onto a single sheet Select Layout I Select Layout Specify how to arrange the documents on the page 13512 on 1 D a on 1 2 EA on 1 1 Ea 4 on 1 2 P on 1 3 nl p on 1 4 LINKS Basic Copy Operations 63 336 OL40 01S Using the Paper Save Copy Key Pressing the EEA places the machine in paper save copy mode Multiple document pages are copied onto a single sheet allowing you to save on paper NOTE Using lt Paper Save Copy gt reduces the copy ratio automatically the copy ratio is displayed on the
79. pass broadcast packets check whether the settings are correct a If a DNS server is located in an external network set the IP address to be connected not the host name even if connecting to the devices that are on the network that is connected to the machine 261 336 If a DNS server is located on a network that is connected to the machine and the information about the devices that are connected to an external network is registered to the DNS server check whether the settings are correct When the machine cannot connect to the wireless LAN 1 m Check the status of your computer Have the settings of the computer and the wireless router been completed Are the cables of the wireless router including the power cord and LAN cable correctly plugged in a Is the wireless router turned on If the problem persists even after checking the above Turn off the devices and then turn them on again Wait for a while and try again to connect to the network v 2 xl Check whether the machine is turned ON If the machine is turned ON turn it OFF and then turn it back ON v Check the installation site of the machine and the wireless router 3 gy Au Is the machine too far from the wireless router Are there any obstacles such as walls between the machine and the wireless router a Are there any appliances such as microwave ovens or digital cordless phones that emit radio waves near the machine
80. phrases such as connecting to a network The keyword search also supports the AND Boolean to search for multiple keywords Q Search Tab Search the site map Click Site Map on the top part of the screen and a list of all the e Manual topics is displayed From there you can find the topic you are looking for Site Map NOTE System Requirements amp To use the e Manual the following Web browsers are required The content of the e Manual may not display correctly if a browser not listed below is used Windows Internet Explorer 8 0 9 0 10 0 11 0 Firefox 24 ESR F 26 Mac OS Safari 7 Firefox 24 ESR F 26 amp This CD ROM DVD ROM may include manuals in PDF format If you do not have access to Adobe Reader to view the manuals in PDF format try other programs such as PDF Preview developed by Vivid Document Imaging Technologies About the latest e Manual For the latest e Manual see the Canon Web site 313 336 OL40 09W Installing e Manual Install the e Manual on your computer by using the DVD ROM that comes with the machine 1 Insert the User Software and Manuals DVD ROM into the drive on the computer Select a language and click OK if you are prompted to do so If the Software Programs Manuals Setup screen does not appear remove the DVD ROM from the drive and insert it again or see QDisplaying the Software Programs Manuals Setup Screen 2 Click Custom Installation Canon Software Programs Man
81. pune rs coineta T you Ca named Comune Do use Ia SOFTVSARE prohi mas q i moe asar thal ali choses shal abide by the kema thie ores and sheal be mbiai in resiricliarm and obliged borne by gna herunder Ta accapt fa hima of this apnea click Ves Ta dedne fie terms of fnis agemen dick Ha Ta use fiis pragrsm fa termes at fiis sgreememi mus pe soos Back j a The installation begins Wait a moment This process may take some time Instal Manuals Wait b ree Click Exit Q Click Next Exit 315 336 Inestarl Click Mead io adt agtup Fj Hanak v 3 Thess are the manuals forthe device Hau iratai he manuals on your computer pou can display ferm wie using fnis co L Exit Setup O Rastari Cam puer hina Peso rna nd ec Viewing the e Manual Double click the shortcut icon of the e Manual on the desktop NOTE If a security warning message appears Click Allow blocked content Internet Explorer restricted this webpage from running scripts or Allow blocked cantent Viewing the e Manual Directly from the DVD ROM 1 Insert the User Software and Manuals DVD ROM into the drive on the computer Select a language and click OK if you are prompted to do so amp If the Software Programs Manuals Setup screen does not appear remove the DVD ROM from the drive and then insert it again or see Displaying the Software Programs Manuals Setup Screen 2 Click
82. screen You can increase or further reduce the copy ratio before pressing B but the edges of the document might not be copied if you increase it Paper Save Copy is not available when using 2 on 1 gt lt 4 on 1 or ID Card Copy When you copy multiple documents onto one page margins may be created in the copied image m uud Select the paper save copy setting sd Select the document size on the Scan Size screen frs 2 on 1 SEX 4 on 1 191 Sided A Paper save copy settings Select one of four setting combinations Original Portrait Copy 2 on 1 1 1 Sided gt 4 on 1 1 gt 1 Sided gt LINKS Basic Copy Operations Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet 2 on 1 4 on 1 64 336 OL40 01U Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page You can use lt ID Card Copy gt to copy the front and back sides of a card onto the same side of a page This fy J e function is useful when copying a driver s license or ID card NOTE amp ID Card Copy is available with A4 Letter size paper or larger Copy Ratio is automatically set to 10090 When 2 on 1 gt lt 4 on 1 is set pressing E ID Card Copy will not place the machine in ID Card Copy mode In this instance set N on 1 to Off or change it to ID Card Copy m Place the card 5 ID Card Copy E Turn the card over p Ec m How to place the card i Turm over
83. sheets 306 336 Paper Capacity for Manual Feed Slot 1sheet 1sheet 1 sheet 1 sheet ll Paper Type and Setting for the Machine 60 to 80 g m Recycled paper 80 to 90 g m 60 to 80 g m Color paper 80 to 90 g m Bond paper 60 to 163 g m Transparency 1 Label Envelope 1 Use laser printer transparencies Loading Paper B Printable Area The shaded areas in the image below indicate the printable area of the document 5mm 5mm 5mm 250 sheets 170 sheets 250 sheets 170 sheets 100 sheets 50 sheets 100 sheets 20 sheets 307 336 1sheet 1sheet 1 sheet 1 sheet mL sheet 1 sheet 1 sheet mL sheet OL40 09H Copy Specifications Scan Resolution Output Resolution Copy Ratio Copy Speed A4 Plain 1 1 Continuous Copying Capacity First Copy Time A4 Text Photo High Speed 300 x 600 dpi Text Photo Photo Text 600 x 600 dpi 600 x 600 dpi 100 1 1 400 Max 200 141 A5 gt A4 70 A4 gt A5 50 25 Min 23 cpm Maximum 99 copies 9 seconds or less The copy speed on A4 size plain paper on one side printing is measured during continuous copying Copy speeds vary depending on the output resolution the paper type and size and the paper feeding direction Copy speeds on smaller paper sizes may be slower Plus the machine may experience downtime or decrease the copy speed in the middle of a continuous copy run to adjust th
84. software may differ depending on their version 42 47 0L90 00X Other This section describes basic Windows operations and includes disclaimers copyright information and other information 43 47 0L90 00Y Basic Windows Operations Displaying the Printer Folder Enabling Network discovery QGDisplaying the CD ROM DVD ROM Setup Screen 2 Checking the Bit Architecture Displaying Programs and Features or Add or Remove Programs Displaying Device Manager li Displaying the Printer Folder Windows XP Professional Server 2003 Start select Printers and Faxes Windows XP Home Edition Start select Control Panel Printers and Other Hardware Printers and Faxes Windows Vista Start select Control Panel Printer Windows 7 Server 2008 R2 Start select Devices and Printers Windows 8 Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen select Control Panel View devices and printers Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 Right click Start select Control Panel View devices and printers Windows Server 2008 Start select Control Panel double click Printers E Enabling Network discovery If you are using Windows Vista 7 8 8 1 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 enable Network discovery to view the computers on your network Windows Vista Start select Control Panel View network status and tasks under
85. the Settings button You can also configure settings such as the name of the computer to save documents 125 336 O Songs e e aa eA al Lalincs Cosmet graner Lann HFZT rar EO Settings of the Drapia Marne ad Cerak e Lompue Hes PLI Caii Boer Compact POF Bb Sour A Select Scanner Select the scanner machine to use with MF Toolbox M Computer Name When scanning by using the operation panel of the machine there is a procedure to specify a destination to save the scanned document Scanning from the Machine You can edit the computer name that appears on the display of the machine during this procedure Comment You can enter a comment for each type of scan Edit the comment as necessary M Close Toolbox after Finishing Scanning when Started from Device When you scan by using the operation panel of the machine MF Toolbox starts You can specify whether you want to automatically close the MF Toolbox screen when you finish scanning LINKS Configuring Scan Settings in MF Toolbox 126 336 0LA40 04S Configuring Scan Settings in MF Toolbox You can change the preset settings such as the type of scan color or black and white file format and resolution to suit your intended use You can also specify a destination to save the scanned document an application as a forward destination and other settings 7 Dirplay the Sane Dies C Saree o nnnc raga b Ele Hane Eys
86. the appropriate paper is used Q Paper Q Loading Paper Check whether mixed sizes and types of paper are loaded together 271 336 OL40 082 When a Problem Cannot Be Solved If you cannot solve a problem by referring to the information in this chapter contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line IMPORTANT Do not disassemble or repair the machine yourself If you disassemble or repair the machine yourself it may not be covered by warranty B When Contacting Canon When contacting us have the following information ready Product name MF212w MF211 Dealer where you purchased the machine Details about your problem such as what you did and what happened as a result a Serial number eight alphanumeric characters long found on the label on the back side of the machine 212 336 0L40 083 Maintenance This chapter describes upkeep of the machine including how to clean the machine and initialize settings WE Basic Cleaning Cleaning the Machine The machine becomes dirty Exterior Smudge marks appear on originals or printouts Platen Glass Streaks appear on printouts Fixing Assembly The interior of the machine becomes dirty Machine Interior If you want to check the remaining toner level Replacing Toner Cartridges How to replace toner cartridges How to Replace Toner Cartridges Relocating the machine for maintenance or an office move Relocating th
87. was adjusted in Contrast Offt On Preferences p lt Display Settings gt Invert Screen Colors Select On or lt Off gt ET Millimeter Inch Entry Switch 4 Select the unit of measurement Millimetert Inch a Preferences Display Settings Millimeter Inch Entry Switch Select Millimeter or Inch b E Message Display Time E3 Specify the interval in seconds at which two different messages are alternately displayed 1 to 2t to 5 sec Preferences p Display Settings p Message Display Time Enter a number for the interval Scrolling Speed E3 Adjust the speed for scrolling the screen by selecting from three levels Slow Standardt Fast 229 336 H E n E Preferences p Display Settings Scrolling Speed Select the speed p Cursor Movement Configure how the cursor moves after a character is entered on the screen Select Auto to automatically move the cursor to the right of the entered character Select Manual to manually move the cursor to the right of the entered character Autot Manual Preferences p lt Display Settings gt Cursor Movement p Select Auto or Manual STi 230 336 OL40 073 Timer Settings All the settings about the timer are listed with short descriptions Default settings are marked with a
88. when a toner cartridge is nearly empty Note that the print quality becomes poor if you continue printing without taking any action You can check the remaining toner level on the display When a Message Appear OIf Printouts Are Poor in Quality Checking Toner Level B When a Message Appear Depending on which message is displayed you will need to make sure that you have a replacement toner cartridge ready or replace the toner cartridge Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge How to Replace Toner Cartridges Preparing a cartridge is recommended This message notifies you that a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon Shake the toner cartridge to evenly distribute the toner inside the cartridge Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print a large job is recommended Density 0 Original Type Text Copy Ratio 100 1 IMPORTANT You can continue printing when this message is displayed but the print quality may deteriorate Bf Printouts Are Poor in Quality If your printouts begin to show any of the following features one of your toner cartridges is nearly empty Replace the nearly empty toner cartridge even if no message is displayed Q Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge How to Replace Toner Cartridges White streaks appear Partially faded Uneven density Blank space of originals becomes grayish in printouts ll Checking Toner Level You can check the level of remaining t
89. you are connecting the machine and a computer via a USB cable install the software before connecting the USB cable A USB cable is not included with the machine Prepare one separately NOTE The options to be displayed differ depending on your country or region Installing with Easy Installation 1 Log on to the computer with an administrator account 2 Insert the User Software and Manuals CD ROM DVD ROM into the drive on the computer 3 Click Easy Installation Canon Software Programs Manuals Setup Iraiak ihe standard prograna and the manuals Custom Instalabian Mezialka thee payana and maniak that you sairi Start Software Programs E Flats programa nequined Tar configuring sahingga etc Manuals Dis flees maniak Online User Registration Chick here 1n access Conon e home page bo regisier anne and answer 3 quamipnname Exi NOTE If you do not want to install the e Manual on your computer or want to customize installed software click Custom Installation If the above screen does not appear see Displaying the CD ROM DVD ROM Setup Screen If AutoPlay is displayed click Run MInst exe 4 Select the connection method with the computer USB Connection Select USB Connection and click Next 9 4 Select Ehe Type of Connection Seg he hoe Of conne chon Debween me device and your compute i 1 Ne
90. 008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 this screen is not displayed Proceed to the following procedure 1 1 Select the machine and click Next Select Device Saeg a target device to instal the divers Select Device Select the device from the device let and click Wet Il the device g mot lished in the device list cick galt by IP Address and specily the device IP address manually Print Test Page Em Update Device List NOTE If no machines are displayed in Device List Check the computer and machine connection and IP address settings Viewing Network Settings e Manual and click Update Device List If the machine is still not displayed at all click Search by IP Address enter the IP address set on the machine OK 1 2 Select the drivers to install and click Next If you did not select Printer proceed to step 14 If you did not select either Printer or Fax proceed to step 15 22 4 Select Device Taga Device Select Driver Canon MF LX See haal Driver t Install Print Test Page is s V Fax for Supported Models E Canon Driver Information Assist Service When you install thes service and use shared or local printers functions that allow you to obtain device infomation will ba added to your computer cack mens canes NOTE To obtain device information for using a print server Select the Canon Driver Information
91. 18 336 OL40 070 Setting Menu List There are various settings in this machine You can adjust each of the settings in detail Access these settings by pressing 3 TIPS You can print the setting menu in list form to check the current settings Output Report 219 336 OL40 071 Network Settings All the settings about the network are listed with short descriptions Default settings are marked with a V UAM EPUM UTE dagger Network Settings bs Output Reports Preferences Timer Setting NOTE If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press A GSetting the System Manager PIN Select Wired Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Settings OTCP IP Settings SNMP Settings Dedicated Port Settings Waiting Time for Connection at Startup Ethernet Driver Settings OlInitialize Network Settings Select Wired Wireless LAN When switching the machine from Wireless LAN to Wired LAN you need to specify the setting Conversely when switching the machine from Wired LAN to Wireless LAN you do not need to specify this setting You can switch using the following Wireless LAN Settings Q Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN Wired LANt Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Settings Specify settings for connecting the machine to a wireless LAN You can also view the current settings or specify the setting for saving power consumption See Getting Started Manuals Included wi
92. 4 Setting IPv6 Addresses 166 Viewing Network Settings 169 Configuring the Machine for Printing from a Computer 172 Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions 173 Configuring Printer Ports 176 Setting Up Print Server 179 Configuring the Machine for Your Network Environment 182 Configuring Ethernet Settings 183 Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit 185 3 336 Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network Configuring DNS Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP Security Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access Setting the System Manager PIN Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls MF212w Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules Changing Port Numbers MF212w Setting a Proxy MF212w Restricting the Machine s Functions MF212w Disabling HTTP Communication Disabling Remote UI Using Remote UI MF212w Starting Remote UI Remote UI Screens Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI Setting Menu List Network Settings MF212w Output Report Preferences Timer Settings Copy Settings Scan Settings Printer Settings Adjustment Maintenance System Management Settings Initialize Menu Troubleshooting Clearing Jams When an Error Message Appears Common Problems Installation Settings Problems Copying Problems Printing Problems When You Cannot Print Properly Printing Results Are Not Satisfacto
93. A512 RSA are available only when the RSA key length is 1024 bits or more NOTE The machine does not support use of a certificate revocation list CRL 102 336 OL40 04A Generating Key Pairs A key pair can be generated with the machine when it is required for encrypted communication via Transport Layer Security TLS You can use TLS when accessing the machine from an Apple device in order to use AirPrint Up to three key pairs can be registered to the machine Generate Network Communication Key Generate Key and Certificate Signing Request CSR Communicat i Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode Starting Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration 4 Click Generate Key Reg eon Sater Fasse Saige Serer tty elie a Rey ard Corie Dating ey asd Celica LL NOTE Deleting a registered key pair Click Delete on the right of the key pair you want to delete click OK TLS is displayed for a currently used key pair and the key pair cannot be deleted In this case disable the function or replace the key pair before deleting it D Select Network Communication and click OK 103 336 Tari pe Gea Far a Fura runi Tur ru Banc ur r 2 ums aoe Cerise Partie r Deren ade Cry rrI m Pi ce A pip ex macurig by crmauia bord ped Turin Tera Sen Franc Canem Dacirety Caf x ly and Cerone Deis ere Eg ox Gamers penn Comerica
94. AN For information on how to make sure see Getting Started Manuals Included with the Machine 3 Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box How to display the print dialog box differs for each application For more information see the instruction manual for the application you are using 4 Select this machine in the print dialog box a The printers connected to your Macintosh are displayed Select this machine in this step D Specify the print settings as necessary Presets Specify the print settings by selecting a preset setting from the drop down list Copies Specify the number of copies Pages Specify the range of the pages to print when printing a document with multiple pages NOTE The available settings differ depending on the application you are using 6 Click Print a Printing starts To cancel printing Canceling AirPrint Printing Canceling AirPrint Printing You have two options to cancel printing You can cancel printing from the operation panel of the machine Canceling Prints or from an Apple device with the following procedure lli Canceling from iPad iPhone or iPod touch 1 Press the Home button twice 95 336 2 Tap Print Center to display the list of the documents to be printed 3 Tap the document you want to cancel and tap Cancel Printing E Canceling from Macintosh 1 Click the printer icon that is displayed in the Dock on the desktop
95. Bey A Key Settings Key Name Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for naming the key pair Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in a list Signature Algorithm Select the signature algorithm from the drop down list Key Algorithm RSA is used for generating a key pair Select the key length from the drop down list The larger the number for the key length the slower the communication However the security is tighter NOTE 512 bit cannot be selected for the key length if SHA384 or SHA512 is selected for Signature Algorithm Certificate Settings Validity Start Date YYYY MM DD Enter the date from which the certificate is valid between 01 01 2000 and 12 31 2099 Validity End Date YYYY MM DD Enter the date to which the certificate is valid between 01 01 2000 and 12 31 2099 A date earlier than Validity Start Date YYYY MM DD cannot be set Country Region Click the Select Country Region radio button and select the country region from the drop down list You can also click the Enter Internet Country Code radio button and enter a country code such as US for the United States State City Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary Organization Organization Unit Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary Common Name Enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certi
96. DHCP Option Settings Select whether to acquire the host name and whether to use the dynamic update function via the DHCP options when DHCP is enabled Configuring DNS Acquire Host Name Off Ont DNS Dynamic Update Off On IPv6 Settings Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv6 network Use IPv6 Enable or disable IPv6 in the machine You can also view the current settings Setting IPv6 Addresses Offt On Check Settings Stateless Address Settings Enable or disable stateless addresses Setting IPv6 Addresses Off Ont Check Settings Use DHCPv6 Enable or disable the stateful address that is acquired via DHCPv6 Setting IPv6 Addresses Check Settings Stateful Address Prefix Length 222 336 DNS Settings Specify settings for Domain Name System DNS which provides a host name for IP address resolutions OQ Configuring DNS DNS Host Name Domain Name Settings Use IPv4 Host Domain Off Host Name Domain Name Ont DNS Dynamic Update Settings Off t On Register Manual Address Off t On Register Stateful Address Off t On Register Stateless Address Off t On DNS Dynamic Update Interval O to 24 to 48 hr mDNS Settings Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers Q Configuring DNS Off On Use IPv4 Name for mDNS Off mDNS Name Ont LPD Print Settings Enable or disable LPD a printing protocol that can be used on any hardware platform or operating system
97. Dates and Page Numbers 82 Printing Watermarks 83 Selecting Document Type 85 Saving Toner 86 Combining and Printing Multiple Documents 87 Configuring Print Settings to Your Needs 90 Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print Settings 91 Changing Default Settings 93 Using AirPrint MF212w 94 Encrypting Communication of Print Data for Apple Devices with TLS 99 Configuring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certificates 102 Generating Key Pairs 103 Using CA issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates 108 Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certificates 111 Using the Machine as a Scanner 113 Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner MF212w 114 Scanning from the Machine 115 Scanning Using the Scan gt PC Key 117 Scanning from a Computer 120 Scanning Using MF Toolbox 121 Configuring Scan Settings in MF Toolbox 127 Scanning Using an Application 131 Configuring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF 132 Configuring Scan Settings in Simple Mode 133 Configuring Scan Settings in Advanced Mode 135 Network MF212w 145 Connecting to a Network 146 Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN 148 Connecting to a Wired LAN 149 Connecting to a Wireless LAN 150 Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode 152 Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode 154 Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router 156 Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings 158 Checking the SSID and Network Key 161 Setting IP Addresses 163 Setting IPv4 Address 16
98. FJ Mail to System Manager Displays a window for creating an e mail to the system manager specified in System Manager Information under System Management FI Refresh Icon Refreshes the currently displayed page o Device Basic Information Displays the current status of the machine and error information If an error has occurred the link to the Error Information page will be displayed E Consumables Information Displays paper information and the remaining amount of toner Click Check Consumables Details to display the screen for checking consumables Checking Consumables F Support Link Displays the support link specified in Device Information under System Management A Status Monitor Cancel Displays the status of the current print documents and history of print and copy documents You can also check the status of the machine A Settings Registration Displays Settings Registration page When you have logged on in System Manager Mode you can change the settings items and save load the registered data Q Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI Status Monitor Cancel Page 212 336 Fla dr Vue Feud Teak Helo SO oo Jp M E 2 Monitor Caacol C Hits Spars Manager ewer Caran Cae Bur 2815 3 To Portal Returns to Portal Page main page F Menu Click an item and the content is displayed in the right page Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status FI Breadcrumb Trail Indica
99. For more information Printing a Document 296 336 OL40 096 Going Digital From reams of paper to compact data There is so much more you can do after you go digital Scan Only What You Need What if you re scanning a whole page of a newspaper but all you re really interested in is a headline and a photo Use ScanGear MF You can select what you want from a preview and then have the scanner disregard the rest Otherwise you ll have to use an editing program to crop out everything you don t need IMPORTANT Using your product to scan print or otherwise reproduce certain documents and the use of such images as scanned printed or otherwise reproduced by your product may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and or civil liability If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan print or otherwise reproduce any particular document and or of the use of the images scanned printed or otherwise reproduced you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance For more information about this function see 2 Configuring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF Searchable PDFs You can convert scanned documents to regular PDF files or you can go a step further and make the text in that scanned document searchable There s a lot more you can do with a PDF file when you make it text searchable To do this just select PDF as the scan type when you scan with MF Toolbox IMPORTANT You c
100. GE 1 75 GB urbe Windas Update oR Type 3i bm Ogeratinqg Sea et ee Pea sad Tena ibe Abe Fen cer Towels put He lide Aor the Deg ley Tools paapa ba give demain Ml vp semngs WE Displaying Programs and Features or Add or Remove Programs Windows XP Server 2003 Start Control Panel select Add or Remove Programs Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 R2 Start Control Panel select Uninstall a Program Windows 8 Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen Control Panel select Uninstall a Program Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 Right click Start Control Panel select Uninstall a Program Windows Server 2008 Start select Control Panel double click Programs and Features 45 47 W Displaying Device Manager Windows XP Start Control Panel Performance and Maintenance System Hardware select Device Manager Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 R2 Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound or Hardware select Device Manager Windows 8 Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen Control Panel Hardware and Sound select Device Manager Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 Right click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound select Device Manager Windows Server 2003 Start Control Panel System Hardware select Device Manager Windows Server 2008 Start select Control Panel
101. LINKS Q Printing a Document 86 336 OL40 043 Combining and Printing Multiple Documents By using Canon PageComposer you can combine multiple documents into one print job and print the job with specified print settings This function for example enables you to combine documents made with different applications and print all of the pages in the same paper size 1 Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box How to display the print dialog box differs for each application For more information see the instruction manual for the application you are using 2 Select the printer driver for the machine and click Preferences or Properties Cipe Page 159538 plgis hm y Ende e Ser acing page pombe ora ame i a xdi mage range forane 5 12 3 Select Edit and Preview in Output Method Click OK on the Information pop up screen Click OK at the bottom of the screen Basi Poser T idi trie m3 Cinsa MEZID Les im Conon MEDIO Senes FAX s in Location Cammi Page Fange eA Hamberg 1 m Talsi pet Faga 7 Pagar TEEME Eca L3 ae j inier shar amirga page number or a argie EE page range For epa 5 12 The Canon PageComposer starts Printing does not start in this step 87 336 D Repeat steps 1 to 4 for the documents you want to
102. Manuals 3 Click e Manual NOTE Depending on the operating system you are using a security warning message may appear If the message appears allow the content to be displayed in your Web browser 316 336 OL40 09X Uninstalling e Manual You can remove the e Manual from the computer to restore the computer to the same state it was in before the e Manual was installed 1 Insert the User Software and Manuals DVD ROM into the drive on the computer Select a language and click OK if you are prompted to do so 2 Click Start Software Programs Canon Software Programs Manuals Setup i Easy Installation lngialls the siariad programs aad ihe manuals Custom Installation natalis the programs and manuals that you select Bans paogemk sequimed for confiqueng assmngs ele C Manuals Ispis and ininils manuals NOTE If the above screen is not displayed see Displaying the Software Programs Manuals Setup Screen 3 Click Start for Manual Uninstaller Start Software Programs Ghar programa barn ira CODO Cici Sta a tie igi of thee program you want da start Van ual United kar CO The manuals installed by this setup will ba uninstalled Sian i nya Canon MER BF Wirdess Setup se sistant Rasime Cab MFILBP indie Sabup Assislant Es a pol which anabiss jou p confirm m aeoess pirin er x arinetan ka requin d in satireg up a wile LAN cantair k Bar J Z Click Uninstall Unin
103. NKS Q Registering a Custom Paper Size 36 336 OL40 00U Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer load the paper in the manual feed slot Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot IMPORTANT Make sure to load paper in portrait orientation Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation Make sure to load the paper in portrait orientation 1 Lift the dust cover 2 Slide the paper guides apart ep SS Vx NOTE Size abbreviations on the paper guides The abbreviations on the paper guides in the paper drawer indicate paper sizes as follows LGL Legal amp LTR Letter STMT Statement e EXEC Executive 3 Insert the paper into the paper drawer until the paper stops Fan the paper stack well and tap it on a flat surface to align the edges 37 336 IMPORTANT Do not exceed the load limit guide when loading paper Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit guide 3 Loading too much paper can cause paper jams NOTE When loading envelopes or paper with a logo see Loading Envelopes or Loading Preprinted Paper 4 Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper Move the paper guides in so they are exactly the width of the paper IMPORTANT Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper Paper guides that are too loose or too tig
104. R OQ Generating Key Pairs CA Certificate E Digital certificates including CA certificates are similar to other forms of identification such as driver s licenses A r digital certificate contains a digital signature which enables the machine to detect any spoofing or tampering of data It is extremely difficult for third parties to abuse digital certificates A digital certificate that contains a public key of a certification authority CA is referred to as a CA certificate CA certificates are used for verifying the device the machine is communicating with for features such as printing with AirPrint Up to three CA certificates can be registered Using CA issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates ll Key and Certificate Requirements The certificate contained in a key pair generated with the machine conforms to X 509v3 If you install a key pair or a CA certificate from a computer make sure that they meet the following requirements Format Key pair PKCS 12 1 CA certificate X 509v1 or X 509v3 DER encoded binary e Key pair p12 ta cer e CA certificate p12 File extension bore Public key algorithm RSA 512 bits 1024 bits 2048 bits or 4096 bits and key length Certificate signature algorithm SHA1 RSA SHA256 RSA SHA384 RSA 2 SHA512 RSA 2 Certificate thumbprint algorithm SHA1 1 Requirements for the certificate contained in a key pair are pursuant to CA certificates 2 SHA384 RSA and SH
105. R HEREOF MO ABEMOMENT TI THE AGREEMENT SHI ALL BE EFFECTIME uta E55 SIGHED BY DULY AUTHORISED REPRESENTATIVE OF CAMDH Should you have am questions concerning the Agreement or F you Dese En cantact Canon for amy reapan phata wrica t3 Canons sas subsidiary oF diitb dealer serving tha county wies vou obtained the Products Ha pz3202 7 Do vau agree To The Tar in cerra agement oe we Je Specify the folder to install to and click Next Specify the folder for adding an icon and click Next Click Start Click Exit Checking the Results of the Installation You can check whether the MF Drivers are installed correctly or not by whether the icons appear Printer driver 7 When the printer driver is installed correctly an icon for the installed printer appears in the printer folder GbDisplaying the Printer Folder anan MAF z ao Fax driver When the fax driver is installed correctly an icon for the installed fax appears in the printer folder Displaying the Printer Folder Canon MF LE m FAX Scanner driver network connection When the scanner driver is installed correctly an icon for the installed scanner appears in the Scanners and Cameras or Scanners and Cameras Properties folder anon MF mw bs Scanner driver USB connection When the scanner driver is installed correctly an icon for the installed scanner appears in the Scann
106. Select Off or On p Restart the machine Enable or disable the Product Extended Survey Program a program for the machine usage survey Off Ont EJ System Management Settings p Enable Product Extended Survey Program p Select Off or On p E Set whether to display a button in the Remote UI for accessing the Web site for purchasing toner cartridges Also set whether to use Toner Status Displ Consumables Purchase Button RUI 1 Off Ont Toner Status Settings Off Ont Displ Purchase Button Off Ont EJ System Management Settings p Displ Consmbls Info RUI Toner Status Select Displ Consumables Purchase Button RUI gt or Toner Status Settings p Select Off or On p co NOTE If you selected lt On gt for lt Toner Status Settings gt continue by selecting lt On gt or lt Off gt for lt Displ Purchase Button gt 247 336 Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language when it is connected to a computer by using Plug and Play MF Driver Installation Guide Network 1 Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language when it is detected over the network UFRII LT UFRII LT XPS USB Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with th
107. Settings Problems If the problem persists even after checking the wireless LAN connection check the security settings of the wireless router When automatic setting with WPS was attempted the connection failed due to an error Wait for a while and set again If the problem persists check whether the wireless router supports WPS If WPS is supported Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network QInstallation Settings Problems If WPS is not supported Set using another connecting method Connecting to a Wireless LAN The network key the WPA WPA2 PSK or WEP key of a wireless router is not entered correctly Check the network key the WPA WPA2 PSK or WEP key of the wireless router and set it to the machine again For more information about how to check the network key see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer Q Checking the SSID and Network Key Q Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router Q Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings Drawer 1 or MP Tray is displayed for XXXX Paper is not loaded in the paper drawer or the manual feed slot Load the paper Loading Paper 257 336 Paper on which reports or lists can be printed is not loaded Reports or lists can be printed on A4 or Letter size paper Load A4 or Letter size paper and set its size Q Loading Paper QSpecifying Paper Size and
108. TY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON INFRINGEMENT CANON INC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INCIDENTAL OR 334 336 CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL E Copyright Copyright CANON INC 2014 No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of Canon Inc Trademarks Adobe Acrobat Reader and Photoshop are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Apple Bonjour iPad iPhone iPod touch Macintosh Mac OS and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows Server Internet Explorer Word Excel and Power Point are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Portions of this software are copyright 2007 The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved All other product and brand names are registered trademarks trademarks or service marks of their respective owners 335 336 OL40 0A5 Contact Us CANON INC 30 2 Sh
109. Toolbox features preset settings for each purpose including conversion to PDF and color scanning You can scan easily by selecting a preset NOTE When lt Auto Online for Remote Scan gt is set to Off System Management Settings Use the following steps to bring the machine online before operating the machine INN COPY SCAN Select Remote Scanner p Scanning is not possible in the following instances During printing copying etc When cleaning the fixing unit When the toner cover is open Scan after these operations are completed or remedying the error 1 Place the document s Placing Documents 2 Double click the Canon MF Toolbox icon on the desktop MF Toolbox starts 3 Select the scan type Click the icon for the type of scan you want to perform E Ux t Mal A Mail The scanned document is sent as an e mail attachment You can also save it to the computer and manually attach it to an e mail later OCR Characters in the document are extracted as text data through OCR optical character recognition processing You can edit the extracted data by using an OCR software Specify the OCR software in advance A Save The scanned document is saved to the computer PDF The scanned document is converted into a PDF file You can also forward it to an application By default the scanned document is converted into a searchable PDF file where text can be searched using a compu
110. Toolbox from the User Software and Manuals CD ROM DVD ROM that is supplied with the machine Perform the setup procedure from connecting the machine and your computer to installation of the drivers Installing from the Supplied CD ROM DVD ROM ll Installing after Downloading from the Canon Website The latest MF Driver and MF Toolbox versions are available for downloading from the Canon website Download the MF Drivers or MF Toolbox if for example the drivers on the CD ROM DVD ROM do not support the operating system of your computer Installing after Downloading from the Canon Website T aI NOTE Adding a WSD Network Printer If you are using Windows Vista 7 8 8 1 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 you can use WSD Web Services on Devices to add a network printer Installing to Use WSD 8 47 0L90 003 Installing from the Supplied CD ROM DVD ROM The order of operations in Easy Installation is Install the drivers Install the software supplied with the CD ROM DVD ROM Install the e Manual For more information about how to connect the machine and a computer see Getting Started before starting You can choose to install standard software and the e Manual with Easy Installation or specify the software and manuals to install with Custom Installation QInstalling with Easy Installation GInstalling with Custom Installation 2 Checking the Results of the Installation IMPORTANT If
111. Type Text Copy Ratio 100 L N on 1 Off Collate Off Sharpness 0 5 Press E Copying starts If you want to cancel copying press p Yes p OK f Q Canceling Copies iE When copying several pages onto a single sheet or when collating Ea When N on 1 is any setting other than Off or Collate is set to On copy after first scanning all of the document 1 Place the next document on the platen glass and press B Scan Next Press Start start Copying Cancel SheetsxCopies 1x1 Density 0 Repeat this step until you finish scanning the entire document 2 Select Start Copying and press OK NOTE 54 336 OL40 01A When the Size Settings Mismatch memessage appears When an Error Message Appears IMPORTANT When copying documents with text or images that extend to the edges of the page The edges of the document might not be copied For more information about the scan margins see Scan Area TIPS amp If you always want to make copies with the same settings Q Changing Default Settings 55 336 OL40 01C Canceling Copies If you want to cancel copying immediately after pressing of select Cancel or press c on the operation panel You can also cancel copying after checking the copy status ll Canceling in the Screen That is Displayed While Copying m Cancel p p Yes p OK lt Cance gt E Press cs to C
112. You Cannot Print Properly You cannot print a Is a printer driver installed to your computer correctly MF Driver Installation Guide 264 336 OL40 07X When You Cannot Print Properly If printing results are not satisfactory or paper creases or curls try the following solutions If the problems persist contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line Smudge Marks Appear on the Streaks Appear on Printouts GO White Streaks Appear Edge of Printouts Toner Smudges and Splatters Printouts Are Faded Q Printed Pages Have White Specks Appear QA Portion of the Page Is Not Print Density Is Uneven Printouts Are Grayish Printed 92 Cannot Scan a Printed Barcode Paper Creases Paper Curls 3 Printouts Are Skewed Printouts Are Skewed Paper Is Not Fed Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together 265 336 OL40 07Y Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory Dirt inside the machine may affect printing results Perform care and cleaning to the machine first Q Cleaning the Machine Do you print data without margins This symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver A margin of 5 mm or less around the edge of paper or 10 mm or less around the edge of envelopes is not printable with the machine Make sure to have margins around the document to print Finishing tab Advanced Settings Expand Print Region and Print Off Are you using appropriate p
113. a wore that you compie con recbsd bc tha nuarteezik pr that yreur Biuripcth or enim painter amp ture an Qj om sarine Choose a printer part A pinia part is a tpe dl connection that lows sour comgpuber io exchange information with s printes 6 Click Have Disk 21 41 Install the printer driver J Chimeyi printer Trom the Tert Cirk Win dove Ugidspe do oes mone mede Ta irertali the dires Trom an reiri CD ckck Haee Dk Fareriaciturar all I Prina h Brother ZglBrather DCP ELSC E Canon CalErather DCP LL7C NN Cyl Erather DCP L2aC Fuj Xem Cal Brother DCP L29C FTT LO ea ss Du Po 3 Eg This croar in gradi nigra Windows pie Horee I m Click Browse Wasidherendmnes reais dae and fen rualon murm rud Da cori dew i ocean Sacr Fia pirsa we MF Finn of tipa Setup inisemabien inf Specify the folder where the printer driver is stored as follows 32 bit operating system Specify us eng or uk eng 32bit Driver folders of the CD ROM DVD ROM or downloaded file 64 bit operating system Specify us eng or uk eng x64 Driver folders of the CD ROM DVD ROM or downloaded file NOTE If you do not know whether to specify the 32 bit version or the 64 bit version OG Checking the Bit Architecture Q Click ok iasi the manolscturen s instalation dec and hen J make mune than he cormecr dian p pelecier b lom
114. actiprul support Eb printer pening B Adding a port E3 If the IP address of the machine has been changed add a new port Adding a port is also an effective solution when an incorrect port type was selected in the Windows printer folder during the printer driver installation Click Add Port 2 Select Canon MFNP Port in Available port types and click New Port 176 336 rises ii ded Aude a rota rites puit pra elect F kiia or MSC octets n porre uer Ro paci a prim born bm Prir zs D Heni Method NOTE If the machine is not detected Click Refresh If the problem persists click IP address or MAC address enter the IP address or MAC address of the machine Q Viewing Network Settings and then click Next Acl A rai nibh par 11 posa eteti pF bhian or HAC diners e paci a prim ben ben fet 4 Click Add Finish D Click Close ilChanging the port type or number Ea If the printing protocols G Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions or port numbers Changing Port Numbers MF212w have been changed on the machine the corresponding settings on the computer must also be configured This change is only available for LPR or RAW ports Click Configure Port 2 Click the LPR or RAW radio button in Protocol Type change the number in the Port Number text box as necessary and then click OK Z Click Close 177 336 LINKS QSetting Up Print
115. ailed Settings A wireless router could not be detected due to setting problems of the network to be connected Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network Olnstallation Settings Problems If the problem persists check the security settings of the wireless router Paper jammed during cleaning Remove the jammed paper set paper correctly and perform cleaning again Q Clearing Jams QFixing Assembly The amount of toner required for cleaning the fixing unit is insufficient Cleaning requires toner Replace the toner cartridge and perform the cleaning again QReplacing Toner Cartridges 256 336 The network key PSK of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly Check the network key PSK of the wireless router and set it to the machine again Checking the SSID and Network Key QSetting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router Q Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings If the problem persists even after checking the network key check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network GInstallation Settings Problems A connection failed due to an error while setting wireless LAN connection Restart the machine and set again If the problem persists even after restarting the machine check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network GInstallation
116. an other brand printer as well as print using common operation and settings for each printer PCless quick and easy An even broader range of possibilities for work play with functionality made for this age of speed NOTE For more information on useful functions with smartphones tablets see the Canon website For information on Mopria including certified terminals visit http www mopria org For more information Using the Machine as a Printer For more information Using the Machine as a Scanner Go Wireless MF212w No cables easy installation simple maintenance If you ve got a WPS wireless LAN router bypass the settings process altogether and be ready to go before you know it Enjoy the kind of clutter free and easy to use document system that you can only get from wireless Compatible with IEEE 802 11b g n for stress free wireless and also supports WEP and WPA WPA2 PSK TKIP AES CCMP for tighter security For more information about this function see Connecting to a Wireless LAN Make Posters Blow up a regular one sheet printout and make an exceptionally large poster A large poster will be printed out on nine sheets Put them together in a 3x3 grid and voila 299 336 For more information about this function see 3 Printing Posters 300 336 OL40 098 Specifications The machine specifications are subject to change without prior notice due to improvements of the machine Machi
117. ancel ae we If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When El is Pressed Documents have been scanned and are waiting to be printed Select the copy document to cancel b Select cancel job E9 Yes EA Job status zResume copy 04 02pm Pause Printer 04 02PM P H Use to Cancel m Copy Job Status Id gt Cancel MA lt Yes gt gt E gt 56 336 Status Copying Time 08 01 01 22 PM Number of Orig b SheetxCopy 15x 4 6 Copy Ratio 100 Paper 8 A4 Plain Cancel Cancels copying M Copy details The number of copies settings and other details are displayed If you only want to check the details without canceling copying press EJ to return to the copy main screen LINKS Basic Copy Operations 97 336 OL40 O1E Various Copy Settings A variety of settings are available to suit your needs such as when you want to save paper or make your documents easier to read Enlarging or Reducing Q Copying Multiple Documents onto Copying Both Sides of an ID Card One Sheet 2 on 1 4 on 1 onto One Page Q Collating Copies by Page QUsing the Paper Save Copy Key MF211 58 336 0LA40 0O1F Enlarging or Reducing You can enlarge or reduce copies by using a preset copy ratio such as lt A5 gt A4 gt or by setting a custom copy ratio in increments of 1 Copy Ratio Custom Ratio 14 Q a lt C
118. and other documents AirPrint enables you to wirelessly print from Apple devices such as iPad iPhone iPod touch and Macintosh without using the printer driver Q Printing from iPad iPhone or iPod touch Q Printing from Macintosh 2 Canceling AirPrint Printing Changing AirPrint Settings Troubleshooting for AirPrint others System Requirements To use AirPrint you need one of the following devices with the latest version of iOS iPad all models a iPhone 3GS or later iPod touch 3rd generation or later If you use Macintosh OS X v10 7 or later is required Network Environment Apple devices iPad iPhone iPod touch Macintosh and the machine must be connected to the same LAN Printing from iPad iPhone or iPod touch NOTE To install security functionality in AirPrint set a key pair and a digital certificate before using TLS Encrypting Communication of Print Data for Apple Devices with TLS Q Configuring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certificates 1 Make sure that the machine is turned ON and is connected to the LAN For information on how to make sure see Getting Started Manuals Included with the Machine 2 From the application on your Apple device tap to display the menu options NOTE Icon shape differs depending on the application that you are using From the drop down list tap Print UJ 4 Select this machine from Printer in Printer Options The printers con
119. annot create a searchable PDF in the Macintosh environment For more information about this function see Scanning Using MF Toolbox Convert Text in Scanned Documents 297 336 Text normally gets scanned as an image but you can convert it into text that can also be edited Select OCR as the scan type when you scan with MF Toolbox The software that comes with this machine will convert any text in the scanned image into text data that you can then edit with a text editor For more information about this function see Scanning Using MF Toolbox Add Images to a Work in Progress Some applications work with the machine to let you easily import scanned images directly into documents you re working on This way you can skip the steps of opening a separate application just for receiving the scanned images and then exporting them to the application you re really using For more information about this function see Scanning Using an Application 298 336 OL40 097 So Much More Just what you were looking for There are a variety of features for whatever you need to do at home in the office or even on the road Using a smartphone tablet MF212w You can use this function to print or scan a proposal you worked on while on your way to a business meeting and using a tablet photos taken on a smartphone or handouts from a meeting For example by using Mopria you can print using a single driver even with
120. anting Manage deieh ponder si Devices 2 a Printers and Faxes 3 tanen MEJIO Serie Diaw dy Deuh Cabegary Printer es Pode Card AFIL Senes Statue D decumas iniquae 327 336 4 Print a test page Click the General tab Click Print Test Page to print a test page Farir Color Ma Paper avaiable Dosgble sdedi Mo Staple Ho Somed 14 ppm Mami resolution 1218 dpi Letter li Checking the Bit Architecture If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista 7 8 8 1 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 follow the procedure below 1 Display Control Panel Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Start select Control Panel Windows 8 Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen select Control Panel Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 Right click Start select Control Panel 2 Display System Windows Vista 7 8 8 1 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 Click System and Maintenance or System and Security System Windows Server 2008 Click System 3 Check the bit architecture For 32 bit versions 32 bit Operating System is displayed For 64 bit versions 64 bit Operating System is displayed um ols E oy rah Control Panel r3 da a PRE Cenni Panel o System and Secunty Sytem View basic Information about your computer Winckiwa cde Win doses T Utlimaie Copot XXE Micezazft Corp
121. aper Check usable paper and replace with appropriate paper Q Paper Loading Paper If using the appropriate paper still does not solve the problem change one of the Special Mode Z gt Special Mode C and Special Mode D settings Q Special Processing To print from a computer change the setting for Special Print Adjustment in the printer driver NOTE Mode 1 has the least effect while Mode 4 has the most effect Try each in order starting with Mode 1 Increasing the effect makes the print density lighter Outlines may also be blurred or images may appear somewhat grainy Did you just replace the toner cartridge Have you not used the printer for a long period of time Change the setting for Special Mode B OQ Special Processing 266 336 Is toner running low Check how much toner is left and replace the toner cartridges as necessary Q Replacing Toner Cartridges Are you using appropriate paper Check usable paper and replace with appropriate paper QPaper Q Loading Paper Change the setting for Special Mode U gt Q Special Processing Is toner running low Check how much toner is left and replace the toner cartridges as necessary Q Replacing Toner Cartridges Is toner running low Check how much toner is left and replace the toner cartridges as necessary Q Replacing Toner Cartridges Are you using appropriate paper Check usabl
122. aper Drawer IMPORTANT Make sure to load paper in portrait orientation Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation Make sure to load the paper in portrait orientation 1 Open the manual feed cover 2 Spread the paper guides apart a Slide the paper guides outward 5 Se 3 Insert the paper into the manual feed slot until the paper stops Load the paper in portrait orientation with the short edge toward the machine with the print side face up Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation NOTE When loading envelopes or paper with a logo see Loading Envelopes or Q Loading Preprinted Paper 4 Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper a Slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the edges of the paper 40 336 IMPORTANT Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams D Pull out the paper stopper to open gt Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type 41 336 OL40 00X Loading Envelopes Make sure to flatten any curls on envelopes before loading them Also pay attention to the orientation of envelopes and which side is face up Before Loading Envelopes Loaded Orientation NOTE This section describes how to load envelopes in the orientation you want as well as procedures that you need to complete before loading envelopes For a description of the gen
123. ared Key at the wireless router and connect again For more information about how to change see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer 259 336 OL40 07L Common Problems If you encounter problems when using the machine check the items in this section before contacting us If the problems persist contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line Check the Following Is the machine turned ON Is the power cord connected If the machine is turned ON but does not respond turn it OFF check whether the power cord is connected correctly and turn it back ON For information on how to make sure see Getting Started Q Manuals Included with the Machine Are the LAN cable and USB cable connected correctly a Check whether these cables are connected correctly Q Parts and Their Functions Is sleep mode activated If you leave the machine unattended for a specific period of time it enters sleep mode for power conservation not allowing you to operate it To cancel sleep mode press 8 Is any message displayed on the screen If a problem occurs a message is displayed When an Error Message Appears If a problem persists even after checking Click the link that corresponds to the problem QInstallation Settings Problems 2 Copying Problems Printing Problems 260 336 OL40 07R Installation Settings Problems See Common Problems also
124. at language when it is connected to a computer via USB UFRII LT UFRII LT XPS NOTE For USB this setting is enabled the next time the main power is turned ON S System Management Settings p PDL Selection Plug and Play i gt Select Network or USB p Select a page description language b 5 PDL Selection PnP UFRII LT XPS lt UFRIILT gt Detects and connects the machine as a UFRII LT printer UFRII LT XPS gt Detects and connects the machine as a UFRII LT printer that is compatible with XML Paper Specification XPS Select how to install the firmware update according to the environment of the machine a lt Via PC Select to manually install the firmware update available on the Canon Web site yourself For instructions on how to install the update see the instruction manual available on the Web site When the machine uses a wireless LAN update with Via Internet below or use a USB cable to connect Via Internet 1 Select to automatically install the firmware update without using a computer Follow the on screen instructions to perform the update The machine must be connected to the Internet Version Information Select to check details for the current firmware Via PC Via Internet Version Information 248 336 Select to restore the System Management Settings to the factory defaults You can restore all the System Management Settings at
125. ate Off Sharpness 0 A Settings Select the item you want to set and change the default value LINKS Basic Copy Operations Various Copy Settings Copy Settings 67 336 OL40 03A Using the Machine as a Printer There are many ways to use the machine as a printer You can print documents on your computer by using the printer driver or print from portable devices using AirPrint Make full use of the print functions to suit your needs li Printing from a Computer You can print a document made on your computer by using the printer driver Printing from a Computer ll Printing from a Smartphone Tablet Sis arity You can print a document made on your smartphone or tablet from an iPhone iPad or Android terminal P Using AirPrint You can print without using a printer driver by sending print data wirelessly from Apple devices Using AirPrint MF212w Printing with the Canon Mobile Application You can print from the machine using a smartphone or tablet For more information on this function see the Canon website NOTE This machine also supports Mopria With Mopria you can print using a single driver even with an other brand printer as well as print using common operation and settings for each printer For information on supported models and operating system environments visit http www mopria org 68 336 OL40 03C Printing from a Computer You can print a document made with an applicat
126. bers 195 336 OL40 062 Setting the System Manager PIN Set a System Manager PIN that is intended exclusively for Administrators You can access lt Network Settings gt lt System Management Settings gt etc only when the PIN has been entered correctly It is recommended that only Administrators know the PIN Press j Use A W to select System Management Settings and press R3 Select System Manager Information Settings System Manager PIN I W N HL Specify the System Manager PIN Enter a number of up to seven digits using the numeric keys and press srl When PIN Confirm is displayed enter the PIN once again to confirm System Manager PIN PIN confirm adi anki Blank No settings Apply Press OK NOTE You cannot set a PIN that consists only of zeros such as 00 or 0000000 To disable the PIN press to erase the PIN leave the text box blank and press OK f mSetting the System Manager Name B Select System Manager Name and press OK Sys Manager Info Set System Manager PIN system Manager Name 2 Enter up to 32 characters for the System Manager Name select Apply and press n3 Q Entering Text NOTE Configuring settings via the Remote UI MF212w Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode Click Settings Registration System Management Edit and specify the necessary settings on the displayed
127. ble High makes large scratches and dust less noticeable but may ruin details on the image A Fading Correction The setting is available if you select Color for Color Mode Corrects faded colors on the document or enhances the color saturation of dull colored documents High dramatically corrects the faded colors but may change the color tone of the entire image M Grain Correction Reduces graininess to create a smooth color tone when scanning photographs taken with high speed film High dramatically reduces graininess but may also reduce image sharpness or degrade image quality A Use Unsharp Mask Emphasizes the edges and lines in the image creating a sharper appearance M Use Descreen Reduces the color unevenness and moire that occur when scanning printed images Configure color settings such as brightness contrast and color tone The displayed items vary depending on the settings selected for Color Mode Specifying Settings for Documents and Color Mode When Text Enhanced is selected you cannot configure these settings i E qM a r a A Brightness Contrast Adjusts the brightness and contrast the difference between the light and dark parts of the image To adjust while checking on a graph click on the upper right of the screen Channel If you select Color for Color Mode you can adjust the Red Green and Blue color channels separately To adjust all three
128. ble if you select Color for Color Mode Specifying Settings for Documents and Color Mode NOTE If Color Matching is enabled the Fading Correction Adjusting Image Quality setting and the buttons for brightness and color settings Adjusting Brightness and Color are disabled Always Execute the Auto Tone 141 336 Color tone is automatically adjusted The setting is available if you select Color or Grayscale for Color Mode Monitor Gamma You can display the document at the proper brightness level by specifying the gamma value of the computer display that displays the scanned image The setting is applied if you select Color or Grayscale for Color Mode il Scanner Tab Configure the temporary save destination of files the playing of audio files and other settings Preview can Gor Setinge Scanner Select Fodder Viam Teorey Flan uem Saeed Select Folder Where Temporary Files are Saved Click Browse to change the folder to which an image is temporarily saved Sound Settings You can specify the music or sounds that are played while the machine is scanning or when scanning is complete Click Browse to specify a file to be played The following file formats extensions are supported MIDI files mid rmi midi Audio files wav aif aiff MP3 files mp3 Play Music During Scanning The specified sound file is played while scanning is being performed P
129. bles You can also click Check Consumables Details in Portal Page main page to display the screen for checking consumables B Clark Cou Piui Purpose Trag iva Pisin 105 Ib on Ee Bod iar i LTA Pisin 11 Ib ican 368 E Bord nino Proiducs inda Ter bere Bes damida airig 1 ks taali of roanierfuz aiia ee Caec DECIES FOL Tide H PAL OPE DANI EL ED Click Purchase Consumables to display the page for purchasing consumables NOTE To display Purchase Consumables Set Displ Consumables Purchase Button RUI gt to On in the display System Management Settings The maximum print speed is displayed dh ad Log on to the Remote UI Starting Remote UI Status Monitor Cancel Device Features e munem p 6 ooe Fis Idk Ver h n Teh Halo eis Phor Sonic bene Feats Copright Cp adc 814 Information about the machine and the system manager is displayed This information is set in System Management on the 215 336 Settings Registration page System Management Settings j Log on to the Remote UI Starting Remote UI Status Monitor Cancel Device Information cpm MB E i Gais Blonder Gee IP armani Copi Cleri Bir Tis The total number of pages that have been printed by the copy and print functions is displayed j Log on to the Remote UI Starting Remote UI Status Monitor Cancel Check Count
130. can without Using ScanGear s Window When you scan the document by using an OCR software or other application the ScanGear MF screen may not be displayed In such a case the document is scanned with the setting of the application applied However if the application does not have the following settings enable them here so that these settings are applied for scanning Color Mode Text and Table If the application settings are specified to scan documents in color those settings are replaced and documents are scanned with the ScanGear MF color mode set to Color Mode Text and Table Text Enhanced If the application settings are specified to scan documents in black and white those settings are replaced and documents are scanned with the ScanGear MF color mode set to Text Enhanced M Automatically Quit ScanGear after Scanning The ScanGear MF screen automatically closes after scanning is complete The screen may automatically close with some applications regardless of this setting W Color Settings Tab Configure advanced color and brightness settings such as color matching and gamma correction A Color Correction Select the color correction method Recommended Color tone is vividly reproduced on a computer display This setting is recommended for most color corrections Color Matching Color is adjusted so that the color tone on the display comes closer to that on the printed result This setting is availa
131. cate B Registering a key pair 1 Click Register on the right of the key pair you want to register Sarre esr aa ER xd Marone d arum Barb aap z wy acad Caa Partien LI LL Ld Key dud B Peer feri Corio Enter Po Roxy Pamard Geter Prie rte Kary Paes rer mue panse bey paara Ex thes lie Franke Seins Fia Marsa Class J Puke Prise Key Name Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the name of the key pair to be registered Password Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the password of the private key set for the file to be registered B Registering a CA certificate Click Register on the right of the CA certificate you want to register 109 336 Tara Gest ste Sete Based Taree Soret ere 3 Ch Certs Settings s Begair Oh Car Pee CoE CEC irmi i rne LINKS Q Generating Key Pairs Q Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certificates Q Encrypting Communication of Print Data for Apple Devices with TLS 110 336 OL40 04E Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certificates Once key pairs and CA certificates are registered you can view their detailed information or verify them for validity and signature 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode Starting Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration emp e his BPG Series Lii ita Mae MFTO bban ERN Click Security Settings Key and Certificate Settings for key pairs or CA Certificate Settings for CA certificates
132. ccording to the operating system of the print server Print server Select the check box for 32 bit operating systems x64 Windows XP Server 2003 Server 2003 R2 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 and Server 2003 R2 under 64 bit operating Version systems Windows Vista 7 8 8 1 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 x86 under Processor NOTE If you do not know whether your Windows Vista 7 8 8 1 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 is a 32 bit or 64 bit operating system see Q Checking the Bit Architecture 3 Insert the User Software and Manuals DVD ROM into the drive on the computer click Browse to specify the folder that contains MF Drivers and then click OK If the print server runs a 32 bit operating system select DRIVERS 32bit Driver folders on the provided DVD ROM If the print server runs a 64 bit operating system select DRIVERS x64 Driver folders on the provided DVD ROM 4 Follow the on screen instructions to install the drivers D Click OK li Installing MF Drivers on a Computer via the Print Server Ez 1 Locate the shared printer in the print server Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server 180 336 2 Double click the shared printer 3 Follow the on screen instructions to install the drivers LINKS Q Printing from a Computer 181 336 OL40 05R Configuring the Machine for Your Network Environment Th
133. ch as PDF or JPEG Available formats vary depending on the type of scan you selected in step 1 NOTE Adding comments to a JPEG file If you select JPEG Exif you can add information such as the date or comments to JPEG files when saving them Select the scanned image click Exif Settings and enter your comments on the displayed screen Sar Seanad ua kr o iom A Bist 7 Sans Pacturea b Sullakki gth Darei Dai Save Scanned Image to Specify a save destination folder If you select the Save Pictures to a Subfolder with Current Date check box a subfolder named with the scanning date is created in the specified folder and the data is saved to that folder NOTE If you select PDF Add Page for Save as Type 3 Save Scanned Image to is switched to Create PDF File Based On In this case click Browse and specify an existing PDF file to which you want to add the newly scanned document data The data is added to the existing file as additional pages D Click Save or Forward The scanned data is saved to a folder on a computer or forwarded to an application G Configuring Storing Settings Specifying External Applications to Forward Scanned Data ll Adding Pages to an Existing PDF file Ex Specify an existing PDF file to which you want to add the newly scanned document data The data is added to the existing file as additional pages Place the document start MF Toolbox and proceed with this proc
134. chine will enter sleep mode automatically and can also be put to sleep whenever you want Press once to put the machine to sleep Press it again to instantly wake the machine back into action For more information about this function see Entering Sleep Mode Save Toner Got multi page documents or drafts that don t need presentation quality printing There s a setting that uses less toner Give it a try and save toner and money For more information about this function see Saving Toner 294 336 0L40 095 Improving Efficiency Little things that save lots of time Here are some simple operations that can make complicated tasks more efficient O lt D s CU ue o e 2 D ct D D Remote UI lets you manage a lot from your computer all without having to go over to the machine Configure settings and keep an eye on the machine s status with an intuitive easy to understand Web browser interface that you ll master immediately Save your time and energy for things other than taking care of the machine For more information about this function see Using Remote UI MF212w 03 Fu Make Print Settings Quickly with Intuitive Operation You can easily specify the page layout as well as binding position etc intuitively on the preview image in the printer driver The simple click operation allows you to conveniently make settings while viewing how settings are applied 295 336
135. ck a title or topic to jump to the page Click to return to the page top O a v Click to go to the previous or next chapter 323 336 0LA40 0A0 Viewing e Manual Marks Cautions regarding safety restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the machine useful tips and other information are indicated using the marks below AN WARNING Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly To use the machine safely always pay attention to these warnings A CAUTION Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly To use the machine safely always pay attention to these cautions Indicates an operation that must not be performed Read these items carefully and make sure not to perform the described operations IMPORTANT Indicates operational requirements and restrictions Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the machine correctly and avoid damage to the machine or property NOTE Indicates a clarification of an operation or contains additional explanations for a procedure TIPS Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine Keys and Buttons Used in this Manual Keys on the operation panel and buttons on the computer display appear in the following notation bos Example Keys on the o operation panel Settings l displayed on lt Timer Settings gt the operation lt Specif
136. colors at the same time select Master You can combine the adjustments made in Master and those made in the individual color channels If you select Grayscale for Color Mode only Grayscale is displayed Brightness Slide 4 amp or enter a value 138 336 Contrast Slide a or enter a value When contrast is reduced the difference between the light and dark parts of the image is reduced to create a softer appearance When contrast is increased the difference between the light and dark parts is increased to create a bolder appearance M La Histogram A histogram is a graph that shows the distribution of brightness in an image You can adjust the image while checking the preview image and histogram Specify the part of the image you hmn klasta want to make brightest or darkest in the preview image so that the brightness balance of the original image is automatically adjusted with the specified part being the average Likewise you can also adjust the balance with the brightness of the medium tone being the average ao a a Aun Sabana Jt R E B Heat Lines Channel If you select Color for Color Mode you can adjust the Red Green and Blue color channels separately To adjust all three colors at the same time select Master You can combine the adjustments made in Master and those made in the individual color channels If you select Grayscale for Color Mode only Grayscale
137. combine The documents are added to the Canon PageComposer 6 From the Document Name list select the documents to combine and click LA To select multiple documents click the documents while holding down SHIFT key or CTRL key Be pec Meio Hep aas Gps siren o o Pages Change the settings as necessary and click Combine The documents selected in step 6 are combined Print Preview Displays a preview of the document to be printed Document List Print Settings Click the Document List tab to display the documents added in steps 1 to 4 You can remove documents by selecting them in the list and clicking Delete from List Docureri Hares Pages Laytu inkermalien TEETEDEJ 1 gon _ Document rit 1 imi Douni 1 mi iT at Debate can Lot um Click the Print Settings tab to display the screen for specifying print settings such as the number of copies The settings specified here are applied to the whole print job some p opa Ex pues 5 Carpi ipe antec Laizar Pint Gir Ended Pring BF agendi Cinai zs NOTE For more information click Help on the Canon PageComposer screen 88 336 A Details Displays the print setting screen of the printer driver There are fewer settings available than when using the ordinary printing me
138. configuring your network is automatic and easy If your networking devices do not support automatic configuration or if you want to specify authentication and encryption settings in detail you need to manually set up the connection Make sure that your computer is correctly connected to the network QSetting Up Connection Using WPS Manually Setting Up Connection IMPORTANT Risk of information leak Use wireless LAN connection at your own discretion and at your own risk If the machine is connected to an unsecured network your personal information might be leaked to a third party because radio waves used in wireless communication can go anywhere nearby even beyond walls Wireless LAN security The wireless LAN security that is supported by the machine is listed below For the wireless security compatibility of your wireless router see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer 128 104 64 40 bit WEP WPA PSK TKIP AES CCMP WPA2 PSK TKIP AES CCMP NOTE Required devices for wireless LAN connection The machine does not come with a wireless router Have the router ready as necessary amp The wireless router must conform to IEEE 802 11b g n and be able to communicate in 2 4 GHz frequency band For more information see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer Setting Up Connection Using WPS When using WPS two modes are available p
139. cs in that chapter on the right Click a topic to display its page introduction Installing the Driver is de lios Guess Easy ft Uninstalling Installing after Cevedoading ir a n Defoe starting Vreutierbecting Installing to Use SD Q oa Bon sep Getting Stared this Top Click to return to the top page from any other page Site Map Click to display the titles of all Installation Guide topics Help Click to display information on how to view the Installation Guide how to perform a search and other information Print Click to print the currently displayed topic page M Notice Click to view important information you should know when using the printer Topic Page Topic pages contain information about how to install drivers 39 47 Tnm Site ap kelp Prim E CANON ME Driver installation Guide b a B ninstalling m When you no longer need installed HF Drivers HE Teale of Ehe Product Extended Survey Program you can uina tee bo delet tham from your compuber or ninstelling the ME Drivers ipibn nstiallicug thee MB Teil 3 ninstelling the Product Extended Survey Programs Giminstalling thee Toner Status Uninstalling the MF Drivers X Log on to th d The uninstaller starts NOTE g M yos cacnmot find the printer diriwaor that you vent f se J Q 4 click belete TENERENT inim sm
140. cted chapter If is displayed on the topic clicking it displays the subsections of that topic Click to close the expanded topic Print all All pages of the selected chapter are opened in a separate window The chapter can be printed if necessary Navigation See what chapter topic you are currently viewing o Click to return to the page top O lt gt Click to display the previous or following topic 0 o Click to jump to the corresponding page To return to the previous page click Back on your Web browser og Click to display the hidden detailed descriptions Click again to close the detailed descriptions Search Tab Contains a text box to perform a search and find the page you are looking for 321 336 D Seanch all chapbers We Search fron below chapters Melwrark heteork rk Settings Configering or for Pri Feces a MD Configuring the Machina fcr Printing Lo Setting IPv6 Addresses Pvdi settings tn use IPvb adidrectas Mote that the l function that uses the Ele driver er MF Took Configuring Printing Protacnls and WED Functions ollie WSD Bringing check box ia selected Use WED Scanning Avallabla for Wirsscws virta 7 B 8 1 B H Copyright CANON INC Mec iem ad Enter keyword s here Enter a keyword or keywords and click Es to display the search results in the search dialog box im Search options Click to specify search conditions s
141. ctory default settings to save the most power If you want to change the amount of time that elapses before the machine enters auto sleep mode follow the procedure below 5 minutes setting range is 5 to 30 minutes 5 Timer Settings Auto Sleep Time Set the amount of time that elapses before the machine automatically enters sleep mode E Exiting Sleep Mode Press f You can also press any key other than to exit sleep mode 91 336 0LA40 0A7 Setting Auto Shutdown Time By enabling this setting you can set the machine to automatically shut down The machine automatically turns OFF after the specified period of idle time has elapsed since entering the sleep mode You can cut electric power consumption at night and on holidays if you forget to turn OFF the machine m Timer Settings OK gt Auto Shutdown Time p OK Set the time period OK b IMPORTANT Before setting lt Auto Shutdown Time gt MF212w When the lt Auto Shutdown Time gt setting is enabled the machine may automatically shut down even if you are operating the machine from the Remote UI or from the Send Function Setting Tool A malfunction may occur particularly if the machine shuts down while data is being imported When you import data using the Remote UI or use the Send Function Setting Tool set lt Auto Shutdown Time gt to lt 0 gt Off in advance NOTE amp The default setting is 4 hours
142. d Image and Exif Settings check box If you selected PDF in step 1 select the Confirm the Scanned Image check box F i Foam O O elle alas rent he selecied older cann Ton inan Select Spurs Paster Gra E Deploy hes Esca Decet G Laon beane range in Eee Hanes Son Seve an Tour eoe POF taam Seve Bosma mage kc a ND Facta rn Iz Savas Pictures isg Gabiada gih Dureri hae T Driana Apple soni Diag andi drop ae appli sion icon hee To raga an ate eae EIT iem ie C 3 Click Start Scanning starts To cancel click Cancel The scanned images are displayed as thumbnails on the Scanned Image screen EWhen scanning several documents The screen shown below is displayed Earn Of page 195 aed T it n eva pigi plica Fi cria c aed eie Hoi Dick Fish be qui Went mw 1 If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned place the next document on the platen glass and click Next Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages When there is only one page to be scanned proceed to the next step 2 Click Finish When scanning is complete the scanned document is saved to a folder on the computer or forwarded to an application Configuring Storing Settings Specifying External Applications to Forward Scanned Data 4 Set the file format and save destination 123 336 A Save as Type Select a file format su
143. d cie Hoi Dik Finis bz qui run 1 If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned place the next document on the platen glass and click Next Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages When there is only one page to be scanned proceed to the next step 2 Click Finish When scanning is complete the scanned document is saved to a folder on a computer or forwarded to an application Configuring Storing Settings Specifying External Applications to Forward Scanned Data NOTE If the scanning results are not achieved If the expected scanning results are not achieved for example if the image is too dark or the color tone is different from that in the original you can configure advanced scan settings with ScanGear MF Place the document again select the Display the Scanner Driver check box on the screen in step 6 and click Start to start ScanGear MF 2 Configuring Scan Settings in Simple Mode 2 Configuring Scan Settings in Advanced Mode 122 336 ll Previewing Scanned Images Before Specifying File Format and Saving B You can preview the scanned images before specifying the file format and save destination This procedure is not available when OCR is selected in step 5 Place the document start MF Toolbox and proceed with this procedure 1 Select the scan type Click an icon other than the OCR icon 2 Select the Confirmation of the Scanne
144. dagger t Timer Settings NOTE Asterisks amp Settings marked with 1 may be unavailable or have different defaults depending on the country or region of purchase Settings marked with 2 are only available for the MF212w Quiet Mode Time Date Time Settings Q9 Auto Sleep Time Auto Reset Time Q Function After Auto Reset Q Auto Offline Time Auto Shutdown Time You can reduce the operation sound of the machine when you want it to run more quietly quiet mode Set a time for the machine to enter quiet mode automatically You can also set the machine to always run in quiet mode Entering Quiet Mode Start Time Offt On Start time setting to enter quiet mode End Time Off t On Stop time setting to exit quiet mode Specify date and time settings including the date format and the 12 or 24 hour clock display setting Date Format 1 E3 Select the date format order of year month and day YYYY MM DD MM DD YYYY DD MM YYYYt 53 Timer Settings Date Time Settings Date Format Select the date format gt EJ 231 336 Time Format Select the 12 or 24 hour clock display setting 12 Hour AM PM 24 Hour lt Timer Settings gt Date Time Settings gt Time Format p Select the display setting E Current Date Time Settings E43 Set the current date and time Use 4 li to move the cursor and A W
145. dd If you have selected the Use as Shared Printer Use as Shared Fax check box install additional drivers as necessary Select the operating system and click OK to install additional drivers Check the displayed information and click Start i Installation of the drivers starts Configure the machine normally used and make a test print To configure the machine as the machine normally used select the driver and click Next To print a test page select the driver and click Next Click Exit In Windows Server 2003 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 MF Toolbox is not installed Proceed to step 19 Click Next Welcome to the Setup Wizard for MF Toolbox This Winerd vell maal MF Toobax on your computer To continue cick Nest Specify the folder for installing to and click Next Specify the folder for adding an icon and click Next Click Start u Installation of MF Toolbox starts Click Exit 17 47 1 9 Follow the on screen instructions to install Toner Status Start installation of Toner Status 2 0 Follow the on screen instructions to install Presto PageManager and the e Manual 2 1 Read the information in the following screen carefully select Accept or Do Not Accept and click Next For the development and marketng of products that better meet customer needs Canon requests that the information below related te your Canon product be
146. dify the toner cartridge Doing so may cause the toner to scatter Remove the sealing tape of the toner cartridge completely without using excessive force Doing otherwise may cause the toner to scatter IMPORTANT Handling the toner cartridge Hold the toner cartridge correctly as shown Do not stand it up or turn it upside down 3i fat eros be oer mee wie a dd Do not remove the toner cartridge from this machine or from the protective bag unnecessarily 13 336 a The toner cartridge is a magnetic product Keep it away from floppy disks disk drives and other devices that can be affected by magnetism Failure to do so may result in data loss Storing the toner cartridge Store in the following environment to ensure safe and satisfactory use Storage temperature range 0 to 35 C Storage humidity range 35 to 85 RH relative humidity no condensation Store without opening until the toner cartridge is to be used When removing the toner cartridge from this machine for storage place the removed toner cartridge into the original protective bag or wrap it with a thick cloth When storing the toner cartridge do not store it upright or upside down The toner will solidify and may not return to its original condition even if it is shaken Even within the storable humidity range water droplets condensation may develop inside the toner cartridge if there is a difference of temperature inside and outsid
147. e Do not forcibly remove the jammed document or paper from the machine Forcibly removing the paper may damage parts If you are not able to remove the paper contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line When a Problem Cannot Be Solved 1 Remove the toner cartridge 1 Lift the operation panel IMPORTANT The operation panel cannot be opened if the platen glass cover is not completely closed Forcing the operation panel up may cause damage 2 Open the toner cover by the grip at the front right of the toner cover 252 336 2 Gently pull out the document 3 Check whether paper is jammed inside the output guide 1 Pull out toward you while pressing the button f to open the output guide 3 Close the output guide 4 Check whether paper is jammed inside the machine 1 Gently pull out any paper between the fixing assembly 93 and roller 13 until you can see the edge of the paper 253 336 2 Once the edge of the paper is visible pull it out slowly D Check whether paper is jammed in the manual feed slot or paper drawer 1 Slowly pull out any paper in the manual feed slot 2 Open the paper cover and remove any loaded paper 3 Gently pull out the document 4 Load paper and close the paper cover 6 Install the toner cartridge a Align the right and left projections 3 with the toner cartridge guides and push securely all the way in 254 336 Clo
148. e Machine ll Checking the Total Pages Printed by the Machine If you want to check the total page number of printouts Viewing the Counter Value ll Initializing Settings If you want to restore the settings Initializing Settings 273 336 OL40 084 Cleaning the Machine Regularly clean the machine to prevent deterioration in printing quality and to ensure that you use it safely and easily Carefully read the safety instructions before you start cleaning Maintenance and Inspections Where to Clean 3 Exterior of the machine Q Exterior 3 Interior of the machine and fixing assembly Q Fixing Assembly Machine Interior 3 Platen glass and the underside of the platen grass cover Platen Glass 274 336 Exterior Regularly wipe the exterior of the machine to keep the machine in good condition 1 Turn OFF the machine and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet When you turn OFF the machine data that is waiting to be printed is deleted 2 Clean the exterior of the machine Use a soft well wrung out cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted with water 3 Wait for the exterior of machine to dry completely 4 Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine 275 336 OL40 085 OL40 086 Platen Glass Regularly wipe off the dust from the platen glass and the underside of the platen glass cover to prevent smudges to be printed on documents or printouts 1 Turn OFF t
149. e UI and log on in System Manager Mode Starting Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration I IRE MONEO ume a 0 675 Praa Jeah Hirig 3 Click Network Settings TCP IP Settings 4 FR TRE LOL Fn om rina ind F e ct Vene Fee Jei Hh Primena wig Sane Tan Papar Cem herari TEDER peo f B pega Haj omea Himin itin Funchos ping rH Pal pirg LEL Pret Satire L Pun SETE ED a LETT Tis piap reu Fatima MTU Soe Setting Er aieo d Tedi eid Pie cri Rese Tare kr merui eap Hipsi han tings Waerkets LA Tajiri Bains Wess Pia rins DAN LEPAL Sars 4 Configure DNS settings m Configuring IPv4 DNS Click Edit in IPv4 Settings Preterea emg Seguin Sytem Hacsgemeni Cerne harwark Gsmagr gt TOP Geto doch E pem etos D Tiree Satina Wes Getting oe m Ahire Settings E Fes ugs Amo Apquine or ya Mee ee F digress CET EEES m Terr eb 255 355 255 a Tsay Adee Let ee HU pany aang tele Setting Infserado oe Settings 2 Configure IPv4 DNS settings 187 336 DNS Settings Primary DNS Server Address Enter the IP address of a DNS server Secondary DNS Server Address Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server if any Host Name Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS server Domain Name Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the na
150. e configuration of a network varies depending on the purpose of the network Specify the settings necessary to suit your network environment 182 336 OL40 05S Configuring Ethernet Settings Ethernet is a standard for communicating data in a local area network LAN You can set the communication mode half duplex full duplex and the Ethernet type 10BASE T 100BASE TX In general the machine can be used without changing the defaults OQ Ethernet Driver Settings but you can change these settings to suit your network environment Press E 2 Use A W to select Network Settings and press J If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press n3 Q Setting the System Manager PIN Select Ethernet Driver Settings Auto Detect gt UJ 4 Select whether to configure Ethernet settings automatically or manually Auto Detect TT E Configuring Ethernet settings automatically Select lt On gt and press R3 The machine detects and automatically sets the communication mode and the Ethernet type that can be used ilConfiguring Ethernet settings manually Select Off and press Er 2 Select the communication mode Select Communication Mode p OK select lt Half Duplex gt or lt Full Duplex gt OK f Auto Detect Apply Communication Mode Half Duplex e Full Duplex 1 0 Revie Ethernet Type Half
151. e cover and do not remove or insert paper during printing Doing so can cause paper jams 11 336 OL40 004 Maintenance and Inspections Clean this machine periodically If dust accumulates the machine may not operate properly When cleaning be sure to observe the following If a problem occurs during operation see Troubleshooting If the problem cannot be resolved or you feel the machine requires an inspection see When a Problem Cannot Be Solved IMPORTANT When removing jammed paper or replacing toner cartridges be careful not to get any toner on your hands or clothing If toner gets on your hands or clothing wash them immediately with cold water Washing with warm water can cause toner to adhere and be impossible to remove 12 336 OL40 005 Consumables CAUTION Use caution not to inhale any toner If you should inhale toner consult a physician immediately Use caution so that toner does not get into your eyes or mouth If toner should get into your eyes or mouth immediately wash with cold water and consult a physician Use caution so that toner does not come into contact with your skin If it should wash with soap and cold water If there is any irritation on your skin consult a physician immediately Keep the toner cartridges and other consumables out of the reach of small children If toner is ingested consult a physician or poison control center immediately Do not disassemble or mo
152. e other procedures manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN connection Before specifying detailed settings check and write down the required information including the SSID network key and wireless security protocols Checking the SSID and Network Key Press 3 2 Use A W to select Network Settings and press jg If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press E93 Q Setting the System Manager PIN 3 Select Wireless LAN Settings and press JJ If the Enable the wireless LAN gt message is displayed select Yes and press OK f 4 Read the message that is displayed and press JA D Select SSID Settings Enter Manually gt 6 Enter the SSID that you have written down Enter the SSID using the numeric keys select Apply and press A GEntering Text ger Manual ly E Dr Entry Mode aa Specify the security settings based on the information that you have written down If you do not need to specify the security settings select None and press EA Security Settings None WEP WPA WPA2 PSK BUsing WEP B Select lt WEP gt and press OK 2 Select an authentication method and press OK 802 11 Authentication Open System e Open System Sets open system authentication which is also called open authentication 3 Shared Key Uses the WEP key as
153. e paper and replace with appropriate paper Also specify the paper size and type settings properly Q Paper Q Loading Paper Specifying Paper Size and Type Are you using the machine in a special environment in particular a low temperature environment Toner may not adhere adequately causing printouts to appear faded Change the setting for Special Mode K gt Q Special Processing 267 336 Are you using appropriate paper Check usable paper and replace with appropriate paper QPaper Q Loading Paper Is the drum in the toner cartridge deteriorated Replace the toner cartridge with a new one Replacing Toner Cartridges Are you printing a document with strong contrasts Change the setting for Special Print Mode using the Printer Driver NOTE When set to Special Settings 2 print density is lighter compared with Off or Special Settings 1 Text and lines may also appear faded Do you print data without margins This symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver A margin of 5 mm or less around the edge of paper or 10 mm or less around the edge of envelopes is not printable with the machine Make sure to have margins around the document to print Finishing tab Advanced Settings Expand Print Region and Print Off Is toner running low Check how much toner is left and replace the toner cartridges as necessary Q Replacing Toner Cart
154. e power cord or interface cables resulting in a fire or electrical shock When plugging or unplugging a USB cable when the power plug is plugged into an AC power outlet do not touch the metal part of the connector as this may result in an electrical shock If you are using a cardiac pacemaker This machine generates a low level magnetic flux If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities please move away from this machine and consult your physician immediately CAUTION Do not place heavy objects on this machine as they may fall resulting in injury For your safety please unplug the power cord if the machine will not be used for a long period of time Use caution when opening and closing covers to avoid injury to your hands Keep hands and clothing away from the rollers in the output area If the rollers catch your hands or clothing this may result in personal injury The inside of the machine and the output slot are very hot during and immediately after use Avoid contact with these areas to prevent burns Also printed paper may be hot immediately after being output so use caution when handling it Failure to do so may result in burns A d ER SSS Dena x When copying with a thick book placed on the platen glass do not press the platen glass cover forcefully Doing so may damage the platen glass and result in injury Be careful not to drop a heavy object such as a dictionary on the platen glass Doing so may damage the
155. e temperature inside the machine or maintain the optimal print quality 308 336 Scanner Specifications Type Maximum Scan Size Scan Resolution Driver Color scanner Up to 216 x 297 mm Optical resolution Up to 600 x 600 dpi Software interpolation resolution 9 600 x 9 600 dpi TWAIN WIA 1 0 Windows XP WIA 2 0 Windows Vista 7 8 309 336 OL40 09K OL40 09L Printer Specifications Output Tray Capacity 1 a fresh stack Approx 100 sheets 68 g m of A4 size paper Print Speed 2 23 ppm A4 Plain 1 1 First Print Time 3 6 seconds or less A4 Print 600 dpi x 600 dpi 1 200 dpi equivalent x 1 200 dpi equivalent Resolution i Gradation 256 gradations Toner Cartridges Consumables 1 May varies depending on the installation environment and paper type used 2 The print speed on A4 size plain paper on one side printing is measured during continuous printing Print speeds vary depending on the output resolution the paper type and size and the paper feeding direction Print speeds on smaller paper sizes may be slower Plus the machine may experience downtime or decrease the print speed in the middle of a continuous print run to adjust the temperature inside the machine or maintain the optimal print quality 3 May vary depending on the output environment 310 336 0LA40 09R Consumables The following is a guide to the estimated replacement time for the consumables used i
156. e the toner cartridge Condensation will adversely affect the print quality of toner cartridges Do not store the toner cartridge in the following locations Locations exposed to open flames Locations exposed to direct sunlight or bright light for five minutes or more Locations exposed to excessive salty air Locations where there are corrosive gases i e aerosol sprays and ammonia Locations subject to high temperature and high humidity Locations subject to dramatic changes in temperature and humidity where condensation may easily occur Locations with a large amount of dust Locations within the reach of children Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace Use of counterfeit toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance Canon is not responsible for any malfunction accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge For more information see canon com counterfeit Availability period of repairing parts and toner cartridges The repairing parts and toner cartridges for the machine will be available for at least seven 7 years after production of this machine model has been discontinued Toner cartridge packing materials Save the protective bag for the toner cartridge They are required when transporting this machine a The packing materials may be changed in form or placement or may be added or removed
157. eck your devices and write down the necessary information before setting up the connection For more information see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer SSID A name given for identifying a specific wireless LAN Some other terms used for SSID include access point name and network name A keyword or password used for encrypting data or authenticating a network Some other terms used Network Key for network key include encryption key WEP key WPA WPA2 passphrase and preshared key PSK When manually setting up a wireless connection by specifying detailed settings you need to specify security settings Check the following information Wireless Security Protocols Security types WEP WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Authentication Encryption authentication method Open System Shared Key Encryption method TKIP AES CCMP li Checking the SSID and Network Key from a Computer The SSID or the network key may have been changed If you do not know the SSID or the network key you can check them by using the Canon MF LBP Wireless Setup Assistant included with the User Software and Manuals DVD ROM The Canon MF LBP Wireless Setup Assistant can be used on a computer connected to a wireless LAN 1 Insert the User Software and Manuals DVD ROM into the drive on the computer Select a language and click OK if you are prompted to do so 2 Click Start Software Programs Canon Sof
158. ecting to a Network Q Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN 151 336 OL40 055 Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode If your wireless router supports WPS push button mode you can easily set up a connection with a WPS button IMPORTANT How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help 1 Press ij 2 Use A W to select Network Settings and press J If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press R3 Q Setting the System Manager PIN 3 Select Wireless LAN Settings and press Eig If the Enable the wireless LAN message is displayed select Yes and press En 4 Read the message that is displayed and press JA 5 Select lt WPS Push Button Mode and press fj wi WPS Push Button Mode f WPS PIN Code Mode SSID Settings Power Save Mode Press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router The button must be pressed within 2 minutes after pressing sy in step 6 Depending on the networking device you may need to press and hold the button for 2 seconds or longer See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help NOTE If an error message is displayed during setup Press A and return to step 5 8 Check that the Wi Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel a The Wi Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected 152 336
159. ed Survey Program 22 Click Next 2 3 Select the Restart Computer Now Recommended check box and click Restart after removing the CD ROM DVD ROM Exit Setup Ta perform user repisitratian click inline Weer Registration Im scosss Canons homes page Online User Regisiratinn J oy Revian Campuler How Fo command ed Checking the Results of the Installation You can check whether the MF Drivers MF Toolbox e Manual and etc are installed correctly or not by whether the icons appear Printer driver 7 When the printer driver is installed correctly an icon for the installed printer appears in the printer folder Displaying the Printer Folder Canon MFI aeo 18 47 Fax driver NE When the fax driver is installed correctly an icon for the installed fax appears in the printer folder Displaying A the Printer Folder Canon MF sm FAX Scanner driver network connection When the scanner driver is installed correctly an icon for the installed scanner appears in the Scanners and c Cameras or Scanners and Cameras Properties folder anon MF e Scanner driver USB connection When the scanner driver is installed correctly an icon for the installed scanner appears in the Scanners and Cameras or Scanners and Cameras Properties folder Canon MF be MF Toolbox When MF Toolbox is installed correctly an MF Toolbox icon appears on the desktop Canon MF Toolbox 4 9 N
160. edure The PDF file you select must be created with MF Toolbox Newly scanned document data cannot be added to PDF files created with other applications 1 Select the scan type Click the Mail Save or PDF icon 2 Select PDF Add Page for Save as Type 124 336 d Shares Picture beg Sabija gah Careri ae ES Eimiin Esse as Fie Dny agi E Corfu a S cored bree fm dee Co Click PDF Settings and configure the scan settings as necessary Q Configuring Storing Settings 3 Click Browse and select the PDF file to which you want to add the pages The newly scanned document data is added to the PDF file you select Z Click Start Scanning starts To cancel click Cancel iE When scanning several documents The screen shown below is displayed PNEU VSL T it n adv pii plici i cria c acd cie Hif Dick Firash be quit hem j Fen 1 If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned place the next document on the platen glass and click Next Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages When there is only one page to be scanned proceed to the next step 2 Click Finish When scanning is complete the scanned document is saved to a folder on the computer or forwarded to an application Configuring Storing Settings OSpecifying External Applications to Forward Scanned Data You can switch to another scanner by using
161. ent described in this chapter is for the prevention of damage to property and injury to users of the machine and others Before using this machine read this chapter and follow the instructions to properly use this machine Do not perform any operations not described in this manual Canon will not be responsible for any damages resulting from use not described in this manual improper use or repair changes not performed by Canon or a third party authorized by Canon 6 336 OL40 001 To use this machine safely and comfortably carefully read the following precautions and install the machine in an appropriate location N WARNING Do not install in a location that may result in a fire or electrical shock A location where the ventilation slots are blocked too close to walls beds rugs or similar objects A damp or dusty location A location exposed to direct sunlight or outdoors A location subject to high temperatures A location exposed to open flames Near alcohol paint thinners or other flammable substances Other warnings Do not connect unapproved cables to this machine Doing so may result in a fire or electrical shock Do not place necklaces and other metal objects or containers filled with liquid on the machine If foreign substances come in contact with electrical parts inside the machine it may result in a fire or electrical shock When installing and removing the optional accessories be sure to turn OFF the power unplug the powe
162. eplace with appropriate paper Q Loading Paper Are you using appropriate paper Check usable paper and replace with appropriate paper Q Paper If the problem persists after using appropriate paper change the setting for Special Mode V Q Special Processing Are you using appropriate paper Check usable paper and replace with appropriate paper Also specify the paper size and type settings properly QPaper Q Loading Paper QSpecifying Paper Size and Type If using plain paper 60 to 90 g m making the following change in the printer driver may solve the problem Page Setup tab Paper Type Plain L If the use of the appropriate paper does not solve the poblem change the setting for Special Mode V Q Special Processing 270 336 OL40 081 Paper Is Fed Incorrectly Do the paper guides align with the edges of the paper If the paper guides are too loose or too tight the printouts are skewed Q Loading Paper Is the paper source the manual feed slot Load the paper into the paper drawer Q Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer Are you printing on curled envelopes Uncurl the envelopes and print again Q Loading Envelopes Is paper loaded correctly Fan the paper stack thoroughly so that paper is not stuck together Check whether paper is loaded correctly Q Loading Paper Check whether the number of sheets of paper loaded is appropriate and whether
163. er LINKS Remote UI Screens 216 336 OL40 06W Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI You can change the various machine settings by using the Remote UI Most of the settings can be set also on the machine but some settings can only be set using the Remote UI NOTE You can change the settings only when you have logged on in System Manger Mode 1 Start the Remote UI Starting Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration COLE T PEL F e iii Yer ha Tech Help Oy Remote Ll Portal Lait ibr LI s reno mt Fimi Reedy be pert Grammar d Ready tc ran iere thereto OOO B aT Vr ams iln kiires im 3 Click the menu item you want to set CO fd etr DEAS D com hen Fs bi Yor hc Tech F LTE saper Typa Fen l E iod 25 Es ord Toi p LTE Peper Tepe Plain d Lap Ib Bond 24 cea Cop Cho ir Jai For more information about the settings menu see each item below Menu items Referents Preferences Paper Settings 3Specifying Paper Size and Type Display Settings Timer Settings Timer Settings GO Preferences Function Settings Copy Settings Copy Settings Printer Settings OQ Printer Settings System Management Settings System Management System Management Settings Network Q Network MF212w 217 336 Settings Security Settings G Security Initialize Setting Olnitialize Menu Information LINKS Remote UI Screens 2
164. er folder Displaying the Printer Folder 2 Right click your printer icon and click Printer properties or Properties in the pop up menu CJC3 t Central Panel amp Megane and Saure t Gerkes and Priste Fie fret view Torie Help Add a dicun Add a pantar See what s panting Manage daeh pnra Devices 2 a Printers and Faxes 3 mi Canen MEJLO Series ate e aT Cabegary Printer Pa Madik Cinan MEZIO Seneca Salus dorim in queue 3 Check the port settings a Click the Ports tab 329 336 Make sure that the correct port is selected for the printer E Caran MPH Sarim Print to tha following partia Documaniz wil prir ta the Frat fran PE on Aarie TCP IP Port Starilard TCPAP Port ral Part lec Port Local Part CPt ElEnbk printer pooling 330 336 OL40 0A3 For Mac OS Users Your machine may have not come with a driver for Mac OS depending on when you purchased the machine The drivers are uploaded to the Canon website when they become needed Check the operating system of your computer and download the appropriate driver from the Canon website For the driver installation procedure and how to operate the driver see the MF Driver Installation Guide In the e Manual and MF Driver Installation Guide methods to operate in the Windows environment are explained as examples To view how to use the driver and utility for Mac OS see the following guide or help Function Object Reference G
165. er vertion of the bil drre most inthis compute Uninstall the elder werden of th MF dieis and then bry 16 amal mun Installing the MF Drivers 1 2 5 Log on to the computer with an administrator account Download the drivers from the Canon website http www canon com For more information about how to download the drivers see the driver download page for your machine Unzip the downloaded file If you are making a wired or wireless LAN connection connect the machine to the computer Before starting installation of the drivers configure network settings For more information about how to configure network settings see Getting Started If you are making a USB connection turn OFF the printer 6 Open the folder where the drivers are stored 32 bit operating system us eng or uk eng 32bit folders of the downloaded file 64 bit operating system us eng or uk engl x64 folders of the downloaded file NOTE If you do not know whether to specify the 32 bit version or the 64 bit version for Windows Vista 7 8 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 see Checking the Bit Architecture Double click Setup exe 20 47 r femi Drever misc BE File totes p Fike Babes Resime Fer hte Perime len L IS hile HTRIL Applicaton HTML Applicaton gt E Libraries l Ho megreup AT D KH 685 3 KH Peace MD Wha Readies SG hha MS Computer HTML Application HTML Appliceban 13 5 KH
166. eral procedure for loading paper in the paper drawer or manual feed slot see Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer or Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot Making Printouts on Paper with Logos Load the paper with the logo side the side to print the document face up IMPORTANT Load only one sheet of paper in the manual feed slot each time you print Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation Preprinted Paper Document Print Result Loading Orientation ABC Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation Preprinted Paper Document Print Result Loading Orientation ABC 44 336 Specifying Paper Size and Type OL40 010 You must specify the paper size and type settings to match the paper that is loaded Make sure to change the paper settings when you load the paper that is different from the previously loaded paper IMPORTANT If the setting does not match the size and type of loaded paper a paper jam or printing error may occur 1 Press FJ Paper Setting 2 Use A W to select MP Tray or Drawer 1 and press EJA Select Frequently Us 3 Select the loaded paper size and press J a If the loaded paper size is not displayed use A W to select Other Sizes and press E LTR LGL STMT EXEC No 10 COMIO Monarch Other Sizes 4 Select the loaded paper type and press A Plain 60 90 g m Plain L 60 90 g m Recycled Color Haevy 1 90 120 g
167. eral procedure for loading envelopes in the paper drawer or manual feed slot see Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer or Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot Before Loading Envelopes Follow the procedure below to prepare the envelopes before loading NOTE Only one envelope at a time can be loaded in the manual feed slot Follow steps 1 to 4 in the procedure below to prepare the envelope for loading 1 Close the flap of each envelope 2 Flatten them to release any remaining air and make sure that the edges are pressed tightly M aii gt d 3 Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and flatten any curls 4 Align the edges of the envelope on a flat surface 42 336 Load the envelopes in portrait orientation short edge first with the non glued side front side face up NOTE Load envelopes in the same orientation for both the paper drawer and manual feed slot Load the envelopes so that their flaps are at the left Close the flap and load the envelope Mi 43 336 0LA40 00Y Loading Preprinted Paper When you use paper that has been preprinted with a logo pay attention to the orientation of the paper when loading Load the paper properly so that printing is performed on the correct side of the paper with a logo Making Printouts on Paper with Logos NOTE This section mainly describes how to load preprinted paper with the proper facing and orientation For a description of the gen
168. erations such as sending or printing are being performed Lights up when there are documents waiting to be processed m Start key Press to scan or copy documents gm key Press to enter symbols such as or gm key Press to switch the type of text that is entered LINKS Q Using the Operation Panel 26 336 OL40 00H Display The display shows the screens for copying scanning and other functions as well as the screens for specifying settings for these functions You can also check information such as error messages and communication status on the display Main Screen When you press COPY SCAN the main screen for the selected function is displayed The copy main screen is shown below as an example Press Start Copy 1 10 Ad Density 0 Original Type Text Copy Ratio 100 1 Basic Copy Operations Q Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner MF212w Paper Settings Screen When you press Paper Setting to select the paper to copy or print on the Paper Settings screen is displayed Select the paper on the screen Also for example you can press this key to change the paper settings when you load a paper size that is different from the previously loaded paper size Note that the paper setting must be correctly specified so that the paper is fed properly B MP Tray A Drawer 1 Select Frequently Us A Selecting Paper Tray Use to select the paper for each tray
169. ermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover No radiation can leak from the machine in the normal operation of the product by the user This machine is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product under IEC 60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 W220 to 240 V Model The label shown below is attached to the laser scan unit on the machine DANGER KAO sec DPOSURE TO Bou CAUTION 3253858 vse MiO WM om EELE DE CLASE 3E PRESENTE AL ABAIR M R PENHA DEL R PPHAD LASER SATELEE AMET TUNA WE Ba 3852 0 eo eae Bi ni ale CrENZEPSDAISSESBL PHENDERT Ea TOTEL E This machine has been classified under IEC 60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 and conforms to the following classes CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 APPAREIL LASER DE CLASSE 1 APPARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1 PRODUCTO L SER DE CLASE 1 APARELHO A LASER DE CLASSE 1 LUOKAN 1 LASER TUOTE LASERPRODUKT KLASS 1 CAUTION Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in the manuals for the machine may result in hazardous radiation exposure B WEEE Directive 332 336 x Only for European Union and EEA Norway Iceland and Liechtenstein These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste according to the WEEE Directive 2012 19 EU the Battery Directive 2006 66 EC and or national legislation implementing those Directives If a chemical symbol is printed be
170. ers and Cameras or Scanners and Cameras Properties folder Canon MF eam MF Toolbox When MF Toolbox is installed correctly an MF Toolbox icon appears on the desktop Canon MF Toolbox 4 9 Network Scan Utility 3 When Network Scan Utility is installed correctly a Network Scan Utility icon appears in the taskbar 25 47 NOTE If the icon is not displayed Uninstall the drivers Uninstalling the MF Drivers and repeat the installation from the beginning 26 47 0L90 005 Installing to Use WSD If you are using Windows Vista 7 8 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 you can print by using the WSD Web Services on Devices protocol If you want to use WSD first install the printer driver and then add a network printer GInstalling the MF Drivers Adding a Network Printer Installing the MF Drivers 1 Log on to the computer with an administrator account 2 Open the printer folder Displaying the Printer Folder 3 Click Add a printer or Add Printer eer Hardware end found Devscez and Printers Search Lievices and Print Ee Edt View Tools Help Add s dece Add a printer Devices 1 4 Printers and Faxes 1 io dm Ade Printer What type of printer do you want to install Add a local printer Une thiz ogtion only Fete don t horse a UESB prirjen ire owe gutomeaticalty iertalis USE printers whan pu plug tham in Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer Bisk
171. esses for Firewall Rules Offt On 245 336 System Management Settings Security Settings MAC Address Filter IST Inbound Filter Select Off or On p b D Specify the country or region where the machine is used The default setting may vary depending on the setting selected at initial power on Austria AT Netherlands NL Belarus BY Norway NO Belgium BE Poland PL Czech Republic CZ Portugal PT Denmark DK Russia RU Egypt EG Saudi Arabia SA Finland FI Slovenia SI France FR South Africa ZA Germany DE Spain ES Greece GR Sweden SE Hungary HU Switzerland CH Ireland IE Ukraine UA Italy IT Great Britain GB Jordan JO Other Luxembourg LU Fi System Management Settings p Select Country Region p Select a country or region eal amp Select whether to use the Remote UI a feature that enables you to specify the machine settings by using a Web browser Disabling Remote UI Use Remote UI Off Ont Select whether to use this feature to go online for remote scanning even without using the operation panel Off Ont S System Management Settings p Auto Online for Remote Scan Select On or Off p D 246 336 Enable or disable the USB port that is used for connecting the machine to a computer Off Ont EJ System Management Settings p Use as USB Device p
172. etting Started Installing the Driver MF Driver Installation Guide Canon MF Printer Driver Guide Print function Driver s Help Using each feature Canon MF Printer Driver Guide Getting Started Installing the Driver eo MF Driver Installation Guide SESERTE HOT Canon Scanner Driver Guide Scanning Canon Scanner Driver Guide Setting the MF Toolbox or ScanGear MF E Displaying the Driver Guide Double click the following HTML file in the Documents folder on the supplied DVD ROM Canon MF Printer Driver Guide Documents Print XXXXXX Guide index html Canon Scanner Driver Guide Documents Scan XXXXXX Guide index html For XXXXXX select your desired language B Displaying the Driver Help Click m on the driver 331 336 OL40 0A4 Notice ll Third Party Services and Software Third Party Software MF212w Third Party Software MF211 MEMC requirements of EC Directive This equipment conforms with the essential EMC requirements of EC Directive We declare that this product conforms with the EMC requirements of EC Directive at nominal mains input 230 V 50 Hz although the rated input of the product is 220 to 240 V 50 60 Hz Use of shielded cable is necessary to comply with the technical EMC requirements of EC Directive M Laser Safety Information Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body For this reason laser radiation emitted inside this equipment is h
173. ettings are marked with a dagger t Menu Copy Settings scan Settings Printer Settings Adjustment Maintena Shortcut Key Settings Register scan settings for the EEA and ARE keys for MF211 ENA key The settings include the computer that scanned images are saved in the type of scan color or black and white and the Ex UM PDF or JPEG Registering these settings enables you to scan documents into a specified computer just by pressing a button You can view the registered settings by selecting Confirm Destination Scanning Using the Scan gt PC Key B agn Register Scan PC1 Off t USB Connection Color Scan B amp W Scan Custom 1 Custom 2 Network Connection Color Scan B amp W Scan Custom 1 Custom 2 Scan PC2 Off t USB Connection Color Scan B amp W Scan Custom 1 Custom 2 Network Connection Color Scan B amp W Scan Custom 1 Custom 2 Confirm Destination Scan gt PC1 Scan gt PC2 n EZ Register Scan PC Off t USB Connection Color Scan B amp W Scan Custom 1 Custom 2 Confirm Destination Scan gt PC 236 336 OL40 078 Printer Settings All the settings about the printer are listed with short descriptions Default settings are marked with a dagger t Printer Settings Q Action When Paper Size Mismatch Mobile Print Halftones Q AirPrint Speed Image Quality Priority NOTE Asterisks Settings marked with an asterisk are only a
174. etwork Scan Utility 3 When Network Scan Utility is installed correctly a Network Scan Utility icon appears in the taskbar e Manual 5 Manual When the e Manual is installed correctly an e Manual icon appears on the desktop If you install the e Manual with Custom Installation the icon does not appear Toner Status 2 When Toner Status is installed correctly a Toner Status icon appears in the taskbar NOTE If the icon is not displayed Uninstall the drivers Uninstalling the MF Drivers and repeat the setup from the beginning Other software You can install Presto PageManager with Custom Installation When Presto PageManager is installed correctly a Presto PageManager icon appears on the desktop 19 47 0L90 004 Installing after Downloading from the Canon Website Install the MF Drivers or MF Toolbox after downloading the latest version from the Canon website Installing the MF Drivers GInstalling the MF Toolbox Checking the Results of the Installation IMPORTANT If you are connecting the machine and a computer via a USB cable install the software before connecting the USB cable A USB cable is not included with the machine Prepare one separately NOTE If an older version is already installed a screen similar to the following appears when installing the new version and installation is canceled Uninstall the older version before installing the new version Uninstalling n ald
175. eview area Auto Crop The cropping frame that fits the scanned image is automatically set Each time you click the icon the cropping frame is reduced You can move the frame or change its size with your mouse NOTE Manually setting multiple scanning areas You can manually add cropping frames You can also specify cropping areas in the document so that each of them can be scanned as separate images Drag the cropping frames to specify the areas you want to scan You can specify up to ten areas Click Scan to scan the areas in the cropping frames as separate images Clear Crop Frame Clears the selected cropping frame fy Left Rotate Right Rotate Rotates the preview image 90 degrees to the left or right Information Displays the current settings of the scanned image such as the color mode and size of the scan area A Select Source Select the image type to scan documents Photo Color Platen Glass The photo document is scanned as a color image Magazine Color Platen Print material such as a magazine is scanned as a color image The color unevenness and Glass moire that occurs when scanning print images is reduced Newspaper B amp W Platen The text document or line drawing is scanned as a black and white image in black and white Glass only with no intermediate shades of gray Document The text or photograph document is scanned as a grayscale image in black and white with Grayscale Platen Glass
176. f the set IP address ME Q Viewing Network Settings The connection method cannot be switched between a wired LAN and a wireless LAN Did you select a wired LAN or a wireless LAN on the operation panel on the machine as well This selection is required to have the machine switch to your selection Q Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN You are unsure of the SSID or the network key of the wireless router to be connected The SSID is not displayed on the screen j Check whether the SSID can be found on the wireless router or package box Check the SSID or the network key of the wireless router by using Canon MF LBP Wireless Setup Assistant Checking the SSID and Network Key The SSID of the wireless router to be connected is not displayed in the access point list Check whether the SSID is correct Q Checking the SSID and Network Key If the SSID of the wireless router is hidden using a stealth mode set the SSID to be visible on the wireless router A mode that disables the SSID auto detection of other devices Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network When the machine cannot connect to the wireless LAN The machine dials up to an unintended connection destination if a dialup router is connected to a network ME If a dialup router does not need to pass broadcast packets set the dialup router so that the broadcast packets will not pass If the dialup router needs to
177. ficate as necessary Common Name is often abbreviated as CN Click OK Keys for network communication may take approximately 10 to 15 minutes to generate After a key pair is generated it is automatically registered to the machine 104 336 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode Starting Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration LUE 1 4 Click Generate Key gree nd Bab TR ege JE ME Si rele Hr E Piraji 5 HERZ 218 irm aca rit Eo NOTE Deleting a registered key pair Click Delete on the right of the key pair you want to delete click OK TLS is displayed for a currently used key pair and the key pair cannot be deleted In this case disable the function or replace the key pair before deleting it D Select Generate Key and Certificate Signing Request CSR and click OK 105 336 Specify settings for the key and certificate Pallio bye Heeger See de Aer ee erp lap ary ee Cer erie r ores Cry or Garments Bey arci Cerificate Zigr ng hagar Can Gore win Key arid Certificate yir Ara CER A Key Settings Key Name Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for naming the key pair Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in a list Signature Algorithm Select the signature algorithm from the drop down list Key Algorithm RSA is used for genera
178. first displayed whenever you open the print settings screen of the printer driver You can change these settings to the settings that you use most often For example if you always want to print 2 document pages on each printout page set 2 on 1 as the default page layout setting From the next time that you open the printer driver screen the setting will always be 2 on 1 eliminating the need to change this setting every time you make prints IMPORTANT To perform the following procedure log on to your computer with an administrator account i Open the printer folder Displaying the Printer Folder 2 Right click the icon of the machine and then click Printing preferences LE Hard amp Devices and Print search Devices and Printers Fie Edit View Took Hep Add a device Add a printer Sinn velati prin Mlarsagu dulauk prnbani Devices 1 Printers and Faxes 4 Canon ME210 Series State DD Detaut Category Printer Modet Carson MFI Serie Babes D document s in queue 3 Change the settings on the printing preferences screen and click OK Make print settings as required on the Basic Settings Page Setup Finishing and Quality tabs Q Various Print Settings LINKS Q Printing a Document Q Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print Settings 93 336 OL40 047 Using AirPrint You do not necessarily need to use a computer for printing photos e mails Web pages
179. gnition software The document is scanned as a grayscale image in black and white with intermediate shades of gray Grayscale similar to a black and white photograph Color The document is scanned as a color image Color The document is scanned as a color image The color unevenness and moire that occurs when scanning Magazine print material is reduced It takes more time to scan when using this setting than when using Color Upper Limit of Attached File This item is displayed when Mail is selected for the type of scan Scanning Using MF Toolbox The quality of the scanned image is automatically adjusted so that the file size does not exceed the maximum limit that you specify here Image Quality Select the resolution of the scanned image that suits your intended use NOTE Available resolutions vary with the file format PDF JPEG A resolution of 75 dpi is a rough guide for displaying the scanned image on a computer and 300 dpi for printing or creating a searchable PDF If you double the output resolution the image file size increases by a factor of 4 If the file size is too large a memory shortage or other error may occur Set the resolution to the minimum required for your intended use M Display the Scanner Driver Select this check box to enable you to configure advanced scan settings with ScanGear MF To start ScanGear MF click Start Configuring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF This i
180. hared Printer Use as Shared Fax check box install additional drivers as necessary Select the operating system and click OK to install additional drivers Check the displayed information and click Start i Installation of the drivers starts Configure the machine normally used and make a test print To configure the machine as the machine normally used select the driver and click Next To print a test page select the driver and click Next Click Restart Installing the MF Toolbox 1 2 3 4 5 6 Log on to the computer with an administrator account Download the MF Toolbox from the Canon website http www canon com For more information about how to download the MF Toolbox see the driver download page for your machine Unzip the downloaded file Open the folder where the MF Toolbox is stored Double click Setup exe GOE oou som Bis Edt Meme Ioni Help Urgenze T rechace im bran Share wih T Firetril s hk Leis n aci eura D Lebron ko Sep ETIT Homage E Computer ME Vebarrt he amp bere Siete BE Shared Click Next 24 47 Read the License Agreement and click Yes to agree licere ens Pisas reed the hearg cerae ayr compisiey ered cse Lhck ran ic BJW ia ee cee eee PRIPOSALS OF PREJE AGREEMENTS VERBAL OS WRITTEN AMD AHY CITHER CONMIUHEICATIONS BETWEEN YOU AMO CANON RELATING TO THE SUBIECT MATTE
181. hared or local pantera functions that allow you to obtain device infomation will ba added to your computer lt Back Mex Cancel NOTE To obtain device information for using a print server Select the Canon Driver Information Assist Service check box al 0 Specify details for each driver Confirm Settings ortam the fellowing setting details You can change lhe panter name 1 vou specily thie printer az shared printe pou can specily the shared printer name and sel ari additional diwar alkeiale diro Confirm the settings and then click Het Printer Pod CHMFHP F481358785A30 16 47 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Settings Cenfim the following setting details Tou can change the fax name IF you specily this lax az a shared fax vau can spacy the shared Fas name and set an additional ceived alteinake ever Contin the settings and then click Mast Fax Part CHMFNP F48139785530 Pant Test Page Driver Canon MFE Seem FAX Est Fax Mame bug 9 alpen Uze as Shared Fax Divers to Add Curent Device 3 Humber of Devices to Set 3 E Printer Name Fax Name Change the name as necessary Use as Shared Printer Use as Shared Fax Select the check box if you want to share the machine using the computer where you are performing the installation as a print server Setting Up Print Server e Manual Shared Name Change the shared name as necessary Drivers to A
182. he machine and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet When you turn OFF the machine data that is waiting to be printed is deleted 2 Open the platen glass cover 3 Clean the platen glass and the underside of the platen glass cover Clean the areas with a cloth dampened with water Then wipe the area with a soft dry cloth 4 Wait for the cleaned area to dry completely 5 Gently close the platen glass cover 6 Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine 276 336 OL40 088 Fixing Assembly Dirt may adhere to the fixing units inside the machine and cause black streaks to appear on printouts To clean the fixing unit perform the following procedure Note that you cannot clean the fixing unit when the machine has documents waiting to be printed To clean the fixing unit you need paper larger than plain A4 or Letter size paper Set the paper in the paper drawer or manual feed slot Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot before performing the following procedure NOTE Cleaning requires toner Make sure that there is sufficient toner remaining beforehand It takes approximately 90 seconds to clean the fixing assembly Checking Toner Level 2 Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot Press E 2 Use A W to select lt Adjustment Maintenance gt and press JA 3 Select Clean Fixing Assembly and press JA 4 Load paper A4 LTR or larger in the manual feed slot and
183. hine and a computer via a network proceed to step 8 To connect the machine and a computer via USB cable proceed to step 13 S Installation of the drivers starts Welcome to the Setup Wizard for the MF drivers This wizard will install the MF drivers on your computer To contre click Nest To use this program you must remove all firewall blocks set against E this program Do you want to change the Windows Firewall settings so that the Windows Firewall block will be removed To make thas setting effecte rt i5 also necessary to allow exceptions in Windows Firewall 8 Select the machine and click Next 15 47 Select Devine Select a target device to mnztall the drivers Select Device ice ket and click Hed Ifthe device is not listed in the Confirm Settings device ist click Search by IF Address and specily the device IP address manually hstall Ext NOTE If no machines are displayed in Device List Check the computer and machine connection and IP address settings Viewing Network Settings e Manual and click Update Device List If the machine is still not displayed at all click Search by IP Address enter the IP address set on the machine OK Taiga Device Canon MF LX ose Driver to Install x Fas far Supported Model 4 Scanner C Canon Drives information Assist Service When you install thes service and use s
184. his section explains how to install the MF Drivers and MF Toolbox so the machine is ready to print from a computer Installing ETT ag E Uninstalling This section explains how to uninstall the MF Drivers or MF Toolbox Uninstalling E Troubleshooting This section explains how to resolve problems that may occur during installation and uninstallation of the MF Drivers or MF Toolbox Q Troubleshooting Il Appendix This section explains how to use the Installation Guide and basic Windows operations Appendix 3 47 0L90 012 About the Drivers and Software Be sure to read the following before installing the MF Drivers or other software How to install differs with the connection method and environment MF Drivers Printer driver Fax driver 1 Scanner driver Network Scan Utility MF Toolbox Toner Status You can print from an application to the machine once you have the printer driver installed on your computer If you install the fax driver on your computer you can select Print from an application select the Canon fax driver as a printer and specify the output destination and options The fax driver converts the data into an image that conforms to standard fax protocols so that the data can be printed or saved using the recipient s fax machine You can use the machine as a scanner once you have the scanner driver installed on your computer You need this utility software to use the machine as a netwo
185. ht can cause misfeeds or paper jams 5 Lower the dust cover NOTE When Legal size paper is loaded The paper guides at the rear edge of the paper will be extended Open the dust cover extension then lower the dust cover gt Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type IMPORTANT When changing the paper size or type The factory default settings for paper size and type are lt A4 gt and lt Plain 60 90 g m2 gt respectively If you load a different size or type of paper into the machine make sure to change the settings If you do not change the settings the machine cannot print properly Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper Manual 2 Sided Printing 38 336 You can print on the back side of printed paper Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the manual feed slot Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot with the side to print face up previously printed side face down amp Load one sheet at a time per each print You can use only the paper printed with this machine amp You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on amp If you are using A5 paper the reverse side may not be printed correctly LINKS Paper 39 336 OL40 00W Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer load the paper in the manual feed slot Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer Q Loading Paper in the P
186. ick Settings Registration j ep DEL peel oh Fis idi We Tesh Hep l Pa Remate UL Portal Vedi fpem Meme Lug pier pp uu E ates Mora HE acie LI s e o mtm SEDER bpr Xn GE Fimi Reedy ie pri ere taternstine irem amc tiirraa imn 3 Click Security Settings MAC Address Filter D Timer marg Semcariey set tg E Function pringas UY Dd ae ey B Copp peniga akn LGE SPP E Fees Mii FAEERE ONT TN Er Bu dee hios Mis m d Fir Deppi L Nic Hili l EL kap TERAH m eony nadir himi Praa Jeshi biaip Fis ldi Vew 5 Settings Registration Prebenienies B Pages petiqa E pegiey tatagi Inbound Filter Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying MAC addresses D Specify the settings for packet filtering 201 336 1 Select the Use Filter check box a Select the check box to restrict communication Clear the check box to disable the restriction 2 Specify the address Enter the MAC address in the Address to Register text box and click Add Allows communication received only with devices having registered MAC addresses and restricts communication with devices with any other MAC addresses You do not need to delimit the address with hyphens or colons Check for entry errors If MAC addresses are incorrectly entered you may become unable to access the machine from the Remote UI in which case you
187. ie Geyser Seen Mase ore amu eee a Kem ace Contra ares c Gere ae Cay c Gamera Ros ami Cort csts Dpi kepam CA gt y eed DanT cam ering Seer C885 Cadi 1 0 Click Choose File specify the file for the certificate signing request and click Register Sebel de Hieper eee ey eles s ey iral Cee eee r ee Erp os enr ta Gey annii Cerca irg Mepa CO ey and Carboin Spring Request DES Ceia Pegler art cute ia mhach tages Wile Fiian Dri dac for Which Signatures Wass Resueated Pe Pe e TE a reae Da Breersc fo e he fe LINKS QUsing CA issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates Q Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certificates Q Encrypting Communication of Print Data for Apple Devices with TLS 107 336 OL40 04C Using CA issued Key Pairs and Digital Certificates Key pairs and digital certificates can be obtained from a certification authority CA for use with the machine You can store and then register these files by using the Remote UI Make sure that the key pair and the certificate satisfy the requirements of the machine Key and Certificate Requirements Up to three key pairs and three CA certificates can be registered 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode Starting Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration Li ita Mames MP eek Lami Upset HEA 04 14 P9 RR eae erica cn o IE 3 Click Security Settings Key and Certificate Settings for key pairs or CA Certificate Settings
188. imomaruko 3 chome Ohta ku Tokyo 146 8501 Japan CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC 16 6 Konan 2 chome Minato ku Tokyo 108 8011 Japan CANON U S A INC One Canon Park Melville NY 11747 U S A CANON EUROPA N V Bovenkerkerweg 59 1185 XB Amstelveen The Netherlands CANON CHINA CO LTD 15F Jinbao Building No 89 Jinbao Street Dongcheng District Beijing 100005 PRC CANON SINGAPORE PTE LTD 1 HarbourFront Avenue 04 01 Keppel Bay Tower Singapore 098632 CANON AUSTRALIA PTY LTD Building A The Park Estate 5 Talavera Road Macquarie Park NSW 2113 Australia CANON GLOBAL WORLDWIDE SITES http www canon com 336 336 Canon MF212w MF211 MF Driver Installation Guide 1 47 Introduction About the Drivers and Software Supported Operating Systems Selecting the Driver to Be Installed Installing Installing from the Supplied CD ROM DVD ROM 9 Installing after Downloading from the Canon Website 20 COD UI BK UJ Installing to Use WSD 27 Uninstalling 32 Troubleshooting 36 Appendix 37 Using the Installation Guide 38 Screen Configuration of the Installation Guide 39 Viewing the Installation Guide 42 Other 43 Basic Windows Operations 44 Notice 47 2 41 0L90 000 Introduction This Installation Guide mainly explains how to install and uninstall the MF Drivers and MF Toolbox NOTE System requirements for installation of the MF Drivers or MF Toolbox Supported Operating Systems ll Installing T
189. ing Borders QSelecting Document Type Q Combining and Printing Multiple Documents 75 336 0L40 03J Q Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet Q Printing Dates and Page Numbers OQ Saving Toner OL40 03K Enlarging or Reducing You can make enlarged or reduced printouts by using a preset print ratio such as A5 to A4 or a custom print gt ratio that you set in increments of 1 Setting Print Ratio by Specifying the Original Document and Paper Size Preset Ratio The print ratio is automatically set based on the document and paper size you have specified ry Basic Settings tab Select the document size in Page Size Select the paper size in Output Size OK Specifying Print Ratio in Increments of 1 ry Basic Settings tab Select the Manual Scaling check box Enter the print ratio in Scaling OK NOTE Depending on the selected paper size you may not be able to set the optimum enlarging reducing ratio For example there may be large blank spaces on your printout or portions of the document that are missing The enlarging reducing settings on some applications have priority over those on the printer driver 76 336 LINKS Q Printing a Document 77 336 OL40 03R Collating Printouts by Page When printing copies of multi page documents select Collate to print complete sets in sequential page order This funct
190. ing Paper Size and Type NOTE If printing from a computer check whether the paper size setting in the printer driver matches the loaded paper size To load paper without changing the settings Load the paper with the size that is set to Paper Settings Q Loading Paper 258 336 The connection to the computer was lost during a scan Check the connection between the machine and the computer Q Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner MF212w A document could not be scanned due to insufficient memory space Select whether to print up to the scanned pages or to cancel the scanning If you cancel divide the document into multiple sections and scan them or change the scanning settings The network key the WEP key of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly Check the network key the WEP key of the wireless router and set it to the machine again Q Checking the SSID and Network Key Q Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router QSetting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings The authentication method of the machine is set to Shared Key but that of the wireless router is set to Open System Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to Open System Q Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router QSetting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings Change the WEP authentication method to Sh
191. ing Started Manuals Included with the Machine Note that if you change the setting from lt Wired LAN gt to lt Wireless LAN gt or vice versa you will need to uninstall MF Drivers installed on your computer and then reinstall them MF Driver Installation Guide 1 Press ij 2 Use A W to select Network Settings and press J If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press OK f Setting the System Manager PIN CJ Select Select Wired Wireless LAN and press iq 4 Select Wired LAN or Wireless LAN and press JA Settings applied Wired LAN Wireless LAN 5 Press fj LINKS Connecting to a Network Connecting to a Wired LAN Connecting to a Wireless LAN 148 336 OL40 053 Connecting to a Wired LAN Connect the machine to a computer via a router Use a LAN cable to connect the machine to the router 1 Connect a LAN cable Connect the machine to a router by using a LAN cable Push the connector in until it clicks into place 2 Wait approximately 2 minutes While you wait the IP address is set automatically NOTE You can set the IP address manually Setting IP Addresses LINKS Connecting to a Network 149 336 OL40 054 Connecting to a Wireless LAN Wireless routers or access points connect the machine to a computer via radio waves If your wireless router is equipped with Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS
192. inter 10 004M wal Status waiting Time 08 01 10 004M Job Type T Printer Document name XxXxX User Name abcabc Output Pages 0 SheeetxCopy 2x 0 10 NOTE Several pages may be output after you cancel printing LINKS Printing a Document Checking the Printing Status 73 336 OL40 03H Checking the Printing Status You can check the current print statuses Useful in the Following Cases When your documents are not printed for a long time you may want to see the waiting list of the documents waiting to be printed When you cannot find your printouts that you thought had been printed you may want to see whether an error has occurred 1 Press 3 2 Use A W to select Print Job Status and press JA Status Monitor Device Status Copy Job Status Print Job Status Network Information 3 Select the document whose status you want to check and press EJA Job Number 0020 Status Printing Time 01 01 09 42AM Job Type fI Printer Print Job Status Displays a list of the documents that are being processed or are waiting to be processed M Details Displays detailed information about the document selected from the list LINKS Q Printing a Document Q Canceling Prints 74 336 Various Print Settings There are a variety of settings to suit your needs such as Enlarged Reduced Q Enlarging or Reducing Q Collating Printouts by Page Q Printing Posters Print
193. ion is useful when preparing handouts for meetings or presentations Ej Faint CETA TH fe ene Mais Faga Sira Page Laya C Hari Sealing ED imi Finishing Specify the sorting method of the printouts when printing multiple page documents Collate The printouts are grouped into complete sets in sequential page order For example if you are printing three copies of a five page document the printouts will be arranged in the following page order 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Group The printouts are not collated For example if you are printing three copies of a five page document the printouts will be arranged in the following page order 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 NOTE If you select Off whether the printouts are collated or not depends on the setting made on the application LINKS Q Printing a Document 78 336 OL40 03S Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet You can print multiple pages onto a single sheet For example you can print four or nine pages onto a single sheet by using 4 on 1 or 9 on 1 Use this function if you want to save paper or to view your document in thumbnails Basic Settings tab In Page Layout select the number of pages to print onto a single sheet In Page Order select the page distribution layout OK A Page Layout Select the number of pages to print onto a single sheet from 1 on 1
194. ion on your computer by using the printer driver There are useful settings on the printer driver such as enlarging reducing that enable you to print your documents in various ways Before you can use this function you need to complete some procedures such as installing the printer driver on your computer For more information see MF Driver Installation Guide About the Printer Driver Help Clicking Help on the printer driver screen displays the Help screen On this screen you can see the detailed descriptions that are not in the e Manual NOTE If you are a Macintosh user see MF Driver Installation Guide for installing the printer drivers and Printer Driver s Help for using print functions For Mac OS Users Depending on the operating system and the type or version of the printer driver you are using the printer driver screens in this manual may differ from your screens 69 336 OL40 03E Printing a Document This section describes how to print a document on your computer by using the printer driver il Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box How to display the print dialog box differs for each application For more information see the instruction manual for the application you are using 2 Select the printer driver for the machine and click Preferences or Properties LL Seb cran Cipi Page B Pages HE Ener ether Giga page number or a angle page range For ap 12
195. ions Lift by the carrying grips on the front of the machine 6 Carefully place the machine at the new installation site For installation steps after moving see Getting Started Manuals Included with the Machine 286 336 OL40 08U Viewing the Counter Value You can check total for the number of pages used for printouts This total includes lists in addition to copies and printouts of data from computers m Device Status p Check Counter p Check Counter 000077 287 336 Initializing Settings You can restore the following settings Olnitializing Menu Olnitializing System Management Settings Olnitializing All Data Settings 288 336 OL40 08W Initializing Menu You can restore the settings of the machine Setting Menu List NOTE To initialize the settings of Network Settings and System Management Settings see Initializing System Management Settings OL40 08X If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press n3 Q Setting the System Manager PIN Initialize Menu Preterences Timer Settings Copy Settings Scan Settings AO1us tme tena Initialize All Hr A Items for initializing Select the setting you want to initialize 5 lt Initialize All gt Initializes all the settings m Initialize Menu p Select the item you want to initialize p Yes p 289 336 OL40 090 Initializing Syste
196. it for at least 10 seconds and turn it back ON 205 336 OL40 067 Restricting the Machine s Functions Some of the functions of the machine may rarely be used or provide opportunities for misuse For security purposes the machine can be set to limit its capabilities by partially or completely disabling these functions Disabling HTTP Communication and Remote Management Disabling HTTP Communication Disabling Remote UI 206 336 0L40 06J Disabling HTTP Communication HTTP is used for communications over the network such as when you access the machine via the Remote UI If you are using a USB connection or are otherwise not using HTTP you can disable HTTP to block malicious third party intrusions via the unused HTTP port IMPORTANT Disabling HTTP disables some of the network capabilities such as the Remote UI WSD printing 1 Press Ei 2 Use A W to select Network Settings and press fg If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press OK f Setting the System Manager PIN 3 Select lt TCP IP Settings gt lt Use HTTP gt 4 Select Off and press JJ a Off Disables HTTP communication 5 On Enables HTTP communication LINKS QUsing Remote UI MF212w Changing Port Numbers MF212w 2 Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions 207 336 OL40 06K Disabling Remote UI The Remote UI is useful because the machine set
197. lay Sound When Scanning is Completed The specified sound file is played when scanning is complete A Test Scanner You can check whether the scan function of the machine is working properly When the Scanner Diagnostics screen opens click Start Registering Frequently Used Settings It is troublesome to configure the color mode image quality or other settings each time you scan If you register frequently used settings as Favorite Settings you can scan simply call the registered settings when scanning NOTE The following settings cannot be registered in Favorite Settings Widths and heights in Input Settings and Output Settings On or off of the jj button to lock the ratio of width to height in Input Settings The magnification percentage 9o in Output Settings 1 Place the document s and click Preview 2 Change the scan settings Select settings to register as necessary 142 336 miEcasee EEE HON cesucc o zm The Add Delete Favorite Settings screen is displayed Add Delete is available when the preview image is displayed 4 Enter a name into Setting Name and click Add Save Enter a name for the settings to register Use a name that is easy to find in the drop down list NOTE Calling registered Favorite Settings Display a preview image and select the registered setting in the drop down list W Regis
198. lay returns to the previous screen 25 336 P OK key Press to apply settings or specified details P Status Monitor key Press to check the status of printing or copy to view the usage history You can also check the status of the machine such as the remaining amounts of paper and toner or whether any errors occurred Display P Paper Setting key Press to select the paper you want to use or to set the size and type of paper loaded in the paper source Specifying Paper Size and Type 13 Numeric keys 0 9 keys Press to enter numbers and text Entering Text A Stop key Press to cancel copying scanning and other operations M Energy Saver key Press to put the machine into sleep mode The key lights up green when the machine is in sleep mode Press the key again to exit sleep mode Entering Sleep Mode i3 Scan gt PC key Press to send the scanned documents to the registered computer Scanning Using the Scan gt PC Key M Paper Save Copy key Press to put the machine into paper save copy mode for copying multiple document pages reduced on a single sheet Using the Paper Save Copy Key MF211 Er Quiet Mode key Press to put the machine into quiet mode While in quiet mode this key is lit in green Press the key again to exit quiet mode Q Entering Quiet Mode E Error indicator Blinks or lights up when an error such as a paper jam occurs 59 Processing Data indicator Blinks while op
199. layed You can also enter phrases such as install the MF Drivers The search will find topics containing all of the words in the phrase AND search Q Search Tab Search the site map Click Site Map on the top part of the screen to display a list of all the Installation Guide topics From there you can find the topic you are looking for Site Map NOTE System requirements To use the Installation Guide one of the following Web browsers is required The content of the Installation Guide may not display correctly if a browser not listed below is used Internet Explorer 8 0 9 0 10 0 11 0 Firefox 24 ESR F 26 38 47 0L90 00U Screen Configuration of the Installation Guide The Installation Guide is divided into different screens and the content of each screen varies Top Page This page appears when the Installation Guide is started E 9999 Top Site Map He Pont d a Canon MF Driver Installation Guide M nntrsdoction Installing the Driver is S c utili Perfectly Easy eA Lininestalling This guide helps you hm Q rem oce is i supplied with your machine VDO w J 3 Appendix L re Copright CANON Dh Canon logo Click to return to the top page from any other page Contents tab Search tab Click to toggle the display between the Contents tab and Search tab Ic Contents Displays the titles of chapters i Place the mouse pointer over one of the titles to display the topi
200. le are firmly inserted into the ports Connecting to a Wired LAN You can test the network b connection if necessary Q Setting IPv4 Address Q Testing the Network Connection Setting IPv4 Address 1 Press ij 2 Use A W to select Network Settings and press JA If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press E Setting the System Manager PIN 3 Select TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings IP Address Settings 4 Configure IP address settings Manual ly Acquire check Settings Auto Acquire Select to automatically assign an IP address via a protocol such as DHCP When Auto Acquire On is displayed automatic addressing is enabled Manually Acquire Select to configure the IP address settings by manually entering an IP address In order to select this option Auto Acquire must be set to Off Check Settings Select when you want to view the current IP address settings mg Automatically assigning an IP address 1 Select lt Auto Acquire gt lt Select Protocol gt 2 Select lt DHCP gt lt BOOTP gt or lt RARP gt and press OK Select Protocol off BOOTP RARP NOTE If you do not want to use DHCP BOOTP RARP to assign an IP address Select Off If you select lt DHCP gt lt BOOTP gt or lt RARP gt when these services are unavailable the machine will waste time and communications resource
201. le size is too large a memory shortage or other error may occur Set the resolution to the minimum required for your intended use Output Size Select the size of the scanned image when it is printed or displayed on a computer Click to switch between the portrait and landscape orientation This button is not available when Flexible is selected If you select Add Delete you can add new output size settings and delete the added sizes Select Flexible to change the output size and the ratio of width to height Drag the area you want to scan on the preview image or enter values for width and height If you specify the magnification percentage in the 96 entry field on the right side of the width and height entry fields the document is enlarged or reduced for scanning A Data Size Displays the data size of the image when it is scanned with the set Output Resolution and Output Size Ei Configure settings for improving the image quality such as correction of scratches or faded colors on a photograph These settings are available if you select Color or Grayscale for Color Mode Specifying Settings for Documents and Color Mode amtoe Wr T FediceDutandScaches tone i CE TEE um wa E Use Descreen 137 336 Auto Tone Automatically adjusts the color tone of the image M Reduce Dust and Scratches Makes dust or scratches on the document less noticea
202. li ba noe au locked ache Blocked Addresses Register addresses to be blocked as well as check or delete registered blocked addresses A Allowed Addresses Register addresses to be allowed as well as check or delete registered allowed addresses 1 Select the Use Filter check box a Select the check box to restrict communication Clear the check box to disable the restriction 2 Specify the address Enter the IP address or the range of IP addresses in the Address to Register text box and click Add Registered address Result Blocked Restricts communication received with devices having their IP addresses entered for Address to Addresses Register Communication is allowed with devices with any other IP addresses Allowed Allows communication received only with devices having their IP addresses entered for Address Addresses to Register and restricts communication with devices with any other IP addresses Allows communication received only with devices having their IP addresses registered in rea a Allowed Addresses and restricts communication with devices with any other IP addresses However communication is restricted for IP addresses also registered in Blocked Addresses IMPORTANT Check for entry errors If IP addresses are incorrectly entered you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI in which case you need to set IPv4 Address Filter or IPv6 Address Filter to Off
203. llective information recorded in the shared product vill be sent In this survey we wil not pend any other informan including your personal informaton For thig reapon from the information that i sent to us we are unable ta identify sedie customers j Vie ere therefore unable to respond to neguests ka dacie any sent nformatean After you install the survey program the above information will be sent to Canon in case of using your Canon product in China to the legally approved research company Phraugh the Interet every month for ten years The Internet connection fee shall be bome by vau E Te accept the terms above elect Accept and then dick Mest 16 start iretallation of the program Send information without can rmatian once installation is complete e C ul If you select Accept the Product Extended Survey Program is installed The Product Extended Survey Program is a program to send basic information related to installation and usage of the printer to Canon every month for 10 years It does not send any other information including your personal information You can uninstall the Product Extended Survey Program at any time Uninstalling the Product Extended Survey Program 16 Click Next al Select the Restart Computer Now Recommended check box and click Restart after removing the CD ROM DVD ROM Exit Setup Ta perform user registration click inline Weer Registration Im scosss Gangs homes page
204. lulistele n uetele ja Estonian muudele asjakohastele s tetele Hereby CANON INC declares that AW NM383 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other English relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Espa ol Por medio de la presente CANON INC declara que el AW NM383 cumple con los requisitos esenciales y Spanish cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE 333 336 EAAnviIKr Me tnv napouoa n CANON INC OnA ve OTI TO UovTEAO AW NM383 ouupop ooverai npoc TIC OUDIWSEIC Greek GNAITNOEIC Kai TIG AOINEG oyerik c OIGTAEEIC Tc O nyiac 1999 5 EK Frangais Par la pr sente CANON INC d clare que l appareil AW NM383 est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux French autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Italiano Con la presente CANON INC dichiara che AW NM383 conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni Italian pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latviski Ar so CANON INC deklare ka AW NM383 atbilst Direktivas 1999 5 EK b tiskajam prasibam un citiem ar to Latvian saistitajiem noteikumiem Lietuviu iuo bendrov CANON INC deklaruoja kad AW NM383 atitinka pagrindinius Direktyvoje 1999 5 EB i d stytus Lithuanian reikalavimus ir kitas josnuostatas Nederlands Hierbij verklaart CANON INC dat AW NM383 in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere Dutch relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999
205. m Management Settings You can restore the settings of the machine Setting Menu List Some settings require restarting the machine to be initialized NOTE If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press Rf G Setting the System Manager PIN Initialize System Management Settings OK Select the item that Restart the machine if necessary lt System Management Settings gt P you want to initialize OK p Yes p Security Settings Remote UI Settings Auto Online for Rem a Use as USB Device Enable Product Exte Displ Consmbls In PDL Selection Plua Initialize ATI b A Items for initializing Select the setting you want to initialize 5 lt Initialize All gt Initializes all the settings NOTE MF212w To initialize the settings in Network Settings you can also press E Network Settings OK lt Initialize Network Settings gt p Yes p Ea 290 336 OL40 091 Initializing All Data Settings To make changes to registered data and settings all at once such as when changing the installation location of the machine you can delete registered data and initialize all settings Setting Menu List together at the same time You are required to restart the machine after initializing all data settings NOTE If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press A GSetti
206. machine and a computer via a network proceed to step 8 To connect the machine and a computer via USB cable proceed to step 10 ut Installation of the drivers starts MF drivers This wizard will install the MF drivers on your computer To continue click Mext To use this program you must remove all firewall blocks set against ek this program Dao you want to change the Windows Firewall settings so that the Windows Firewall block will be removed To make this setting effective it is also necessary to allow exceptions in Windows Firewall Select Device Select a target device to mztall the drivers Select Device Select the device from Ihe device ist and click Weed Ifthe device t not listed in the Confirm Settings device list click Search by IP Address and specily the device IP address manually Exit Tram TTE NOTE If no machines are displayed in Device List 11 47 Check the computer and machine connection and IP address settings Viewing Network Settings e Manual and click Update Device List If the machine is still not displayed at all click Search by IP Address enter the IP address set on the machine OK IP Address Confirm Settings The setup program will install the drivers with the following settings ee Confirm the settings then click Start to start installing Items tor Installation Gondirm Settings Install Poit CN MFHP F4g13937B95 30 Printer Canon MF
207. mation is necessary write down all the information that is displayed Below nhom shou the access ponb dhene harn pour c ompuler Tp connect e perder bo pour somes poii enber he sccess pomi mane 55 D andthe nebvork bey Ja E P bes br tanh eanchy a8 1hown below when recuined daliag Ihe pines vies LAN rebua potea The selup procazt may van bec pirat roche i Ta N Fem endende ncn ie bo ha bale fa foe tha aup iivaa or tha infractions in Yrelece LAH Saiting E npin Beiak Ee E meppien Fas WEP Badii 7 EEEa t 78271 NOTE If wireless routers are not found Click Refresh If nothing happens check that the settings are correctly configured on the computer and the wireless router LINKS Connecting to a Wireless LAN QSetting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router QSetting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings 162 336 OL40 05A Setting IP Addresses Connecting the machine to a network requires a unique network IP address Two versions of IP addresses are available IPv4 and IPv6 Configure these settings depending on the network environment To use IPv6 addresses you need to properly configure the IPv4 address settings 163 336 OL40 05C Setting IPv4 Address Ad The machine s IPv4 address can be either assigned automatically by a dynamic IP addressing protocol such as DHCP or entered manually When connecting the machine to a wired LAN make sure that the connectors of IP 1 92 1 68 the LAN cab
208. me setting OQ Setting Auto Shutdown Time 16 336 OL40 007 Parts and Their Functions This section describes the parts of the machine exterior front and back side and interior and how they function In addition to describing the parts of the machine used for such basic operations as placing documents loading paper and replacing the toner cartridges this section also describes the keys on the operation panel and display Read this section for tips on how to use the machine properly Front Side Back Side Q Interior 2 Manual Feed Slot Paper Drawer Operation Panel 17 336 OL40 008 Front Side 3 Platen glass cover Open to place documents on the platen glass Placing Documents FJ Operation panel The operation panel consists of keys such as the numeric keys and Start key a display and status indicators You can perform all the operations and specify settings from the operation panel You can move it up or down so it is easier to operate Q Operation Panel Display j Output tray Printed paper is output to the output tray A Lift handles Hold the lift handles when carrying the machine Relocating the Machine FI Power switch Turns the power ON or OFF To restart the machine turn OFF the machine wait for at least 10 seconds and turn it back ON F3 Paper stopper Prevents paper that has been output after printing from falling ba Manual feed slot Load the paper into the ma
209. me of the domain the machine belongs to such as example com DNS Dynamic Update Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine s IP address is changed When specifying the interval between updates enter the time in hours in the DNS Dynamic Update Interval text box mDNS Settings Use mDNS Adopted by Bonjour mDNS multicast DNS is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP address without using DNS Select the check box to enable mDNS and enter the mDNS name in the mDNS Name text box M DHCP Option Settings Acquire Host Name Select the check box to enable Option 12 to obtain the host name from the DHCP server DNS Dynamic Update Select the check box to enable Option 81 to dynamically update the DNS records through the DHCP server j Click OK Bo per iate ie EPI E pee Salbei BTE Cacus de Iba es cR el Le Donner tm ten Saver Lure mum DE regn rest be niin oc n primiim p r chen CA Fm ods Ee F Function Serb hase po Oa D Reis a D pgi hrap HTA MUI PRAE Bi rick Settings Az Acquire vell ba CET i Select Prois arl Anis FD are uri ia HT D apap tivi aber rro or dna EP m Configuring IPv6 DNS Click Edit in IPv6 Settings PP Jelbdr nus ery fan etc oF CPO paina mai l ven LFp Pre a Fim Prini Sed Gig inu 188 336 2 Configure IPv6 DNS settings The Use IPv6 check box m
210. monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP To disable monitoring of the printer management information clear the check box Click OK NOTE Disabling SNMPv1 Some of the functions of the machine become unavailable such as obtaining machine information via the printer driver Using the operation panel SNMPv1 settings can also be accessed from Menu screen SNMP Settings 193 336 OL40 060 Security Confidential information is handled by information devices everywhere including computers and printers and any of these devices may become a target for malicious third parties at anytime Attackers may directly gain unauthorized access to your devices or indirectly take advantage of negligence or improper use Either way you may incur unanticipated losses when your confidential information is leaked To counter these risks the machine is equipped with a variety of security functions Set the necessary configuration depending on your network environment E Establishing the Basics of Information Security Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access ll Preparing for Risks from Negligence or Misuse Bg O Restricting the Machine s Functions MF212w 194 336 OL40 061 Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access Prevent unauthorized third parties from accessing and using the machine You can implement multiple security measures such as using firewalls and changing port num
211. n SNMP QMonitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP D Enter the port number using the numeric keys and press EJA 1 65535 LINKS O Configuring Printer Ports 203 336 0LA40 0A9 Setting a Proxy A proxy or HTTP proxy server refers to a computer or software that carries out HTTP communication for other devices especially when communicating with resources outside the network such as when browsing Web sites The client devices connect to the outside network through the proxy server and do not communicate directly to the resources outside Setting a proxy not only facilitates management of traffic between in house and outside networks but also blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti virus protection for enhanced security When setting a proxy make sure that you have the necessary proxy information including the IP address port number and a user name and password for authentication 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode Starting Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration ELT bape EROS c i Oy Remote Ul Portal aa Mel tr Spe bear Lug Leet FP Le us F ee ace remm Erene T a 5 Print lb eiye pri Timar d Reedy ooo LEER LE 1l irum aem lan teers thee 3 Click Network Settings TCP IP Settings u e fa ip Fm bat m hei o Ims Hip m Preferences Wig Sagano Tb Bpan Cerro hereork Teme u Paper Setia iater Siti Tis pia
212. n Id Wireless LAN Information Select to view the current wireless LAN settings Viewing Network Settings MAC Address Wireless LAN Status Latest Error Information Channel SSID Settings Security Settings Power Save Mode TCP IP Settings Specify settings for using the machine in a TCP IP network such as IP address settings IPv4 Settings Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv4 network IP Address Settings Configure the IP address which is used for identifying devices such as computers and printers on a TCP IP network Setting IPv4 Address Auto Acquiret Select Protocol Off DHCPt BOOTP RARP Auto IP Off Ont Manually Acquire IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 Check Settings 221 336 Auto Acquire IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address PING Command Select to check that the machine is connected to a computer over a network Testing the Network Connection DNS Settings Specify settings for Domain Name System DNS which provides a host name for IP address resolutions Configuring DNS DNS Server Settings Primary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 DNS Host Name Domain Name Settings Host Name Domain Name DNS Dynamic Update Settings Off t On DNS Dynamic Update Interval O to 24t to 48 hr mDNS Settings Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers Configuring DNS Off Ont mDNS Name
213. n Cannot install the software When you are in an IPv6 environment the Software Programs Manuals Setup screen may not appear and you cannot install the MF drivers Install the drivers using the WSD port QGInstalling the MF Drivers If an error occurs during the installation uninstall the software restart your computer and install it again GUninstalling the MF Drivers GInstalling the MF Drivers Quit all running applications and install the software again Applications installed from the User Software and Manuals CD ROM DVD ROM supplied with the machine are not properly registered in the MF Toolbox s Applications are automatically registered to the MF Toolbox once they have been installed They are not however if installed while the MF Toolbox is open To access these applications from the toolbox you need to manually register them to the toolbox Configuring Scan Settings in MF Toolbox e Manual Trouble with Uninstallation It takes too long to uninstall the MF Drivers Windows XP Quit all running applications including anti virus applications before uninstalling the software The Canon folder remains in the Start menu after the software has been uninstalled Uninstall the MF Toolbox first before uninstalling the MF Drivers If you uninstall the MF Drivers first the Canon folder may remain after the MF Toolbox has been uninstalled In this case follow the steps in the procedure below to remove the folde
214. n be specified for both IPv4 and IPv6 The packet filters described in this section control communications over TCP UDP and ICMP 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode Starting Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration n EMI Fis Edt Yew Pean Teal Help Sy Remote Ul Portal ed to ptem Visaager Lg eee TU 23 Le uds ie D exe Bone piresi rere nm BETRQU ETE 36 Fiia Reedy be pet tere ara iru aem ln Toor lien 3 Click Security Settings gt IP Address Filter Fis idi Vers Face Tas Help Piara B Pass Berga E peuple Tatai tir el TER r rae Copag Ca Bic Hila 4 Click Edit for the filter type that you want to use Lone LA me Sale IPv4 Address Inbound Filter Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv4 addresses 198 336 IPv6 Address Inbound Filter Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv6 addresses Specify the settings for packet filtering ECEE p a JEN Tis idi We Perce Teh Hep L RENEL I I NENNEN COE E aa a Oo Seflings Regisbration tle gre m de E wt pt the merce ee Rl po DIN EINEN NIE TE aides ischaies in Goth pasi biian maiksi id att nk be peed an lorie mikhu o anc mpe F aiia gi Hon ams Oria L d ha au oar TY XT FTY DA IT3 TYR WIT DIY TP acceso Pola in orm Bcc A 360 Boop Oops o
215. n conformitate cu cerin ele esen iale si cu Romanian alte prevederi relevante incluse n Directiva 1999 5 CE SENTAPEKN C Hacrosujemo CANON INC aeknapnpa ue AW NM383 orroBaps Ha CbUecCTBeHnTe N3nCKBaHNA N npyrure NPUNOKUMU n3ncKBaHna Ha AupektuBa 1999 5 EC e3UK Bulgarian slenska H r me l sir CANON INC v yfir a AW NM383 s i samr mi vi grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru Icelandic tilskipun 1999 5 EC Norsk CANON INC erkl rer herved at utstyret AW NM383 er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige Norwegian relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Gaeilge Irish Dearbha onn CANON INC leis seo go gcloionn AW NM383 le ceanglais riachtanacha agus le for lacha bhartha g eile na Treorach 1999 5 CE For Europe only Canon Inc Canon Europa N V Regulatory information for users in Jordan MF212w includes approved Wireless LAN Module Model name AW NM383 Contains Wireless LAN Module approved by TRC SS 2014 38 Regulatory information for users in UAE MF212w includes approved Wireless LAN Module Model name AW NM383 TRA REGISTERED No ER0126617 14 DEALER No DA0060877 11 B Disclaimers The information in this document is subject to change without notice CANON INC MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THEREOF WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY MERCHANTABILI
216. n the machine is restarted or turned ON 1 An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode Starting Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration SM eop DAES ma eo im Fis idi Yer Venetian Teh Hap V Remote Ul Portal Val so ipte Visage Lag ee TS LIS E E inis ho CT c iei e pese Boch peiramralirsnn terres tates Seren pT Ao Presta lb Era tz prre E bimer M Reedy ie smar pron mara s HTH Vra aam ln Tirso lie 3 Click Network Settings TCP IP Settings F pd yie o Je o Ha Haimar eniti ger SIUE thas Dude shed Fiet alba Roses Tii Vus rulers i eap Hipa Denis ai ies aariaa MY Fbi Brins t West Fia riran AN Li Enig Resp Click Edit in IPv6 Settings 166 336 4X DSL epoi ALMADI ire ariet rrini Wa cht Vane ha Teh Hisp Use IPv6 Select the check box to enable IPv6 on the machine When not using IPv6 clear the check box Stateless Address Select the check box when using a stateless address When not using a stateless address clear the check box Use Manual Address When you want to manually enter an IPv6 address select the check box and enter the IP address prefix length and default router address in the corresponding text boxes IP Address Enter an IPv6 address Addresses that start with ff or multicast address
217. n this machine Purchase consumables at your local authorized Canon dealer Observe safety and health precautions when storing and handling consumables Consumables NOTE Depending on the installation environment printing paper size or document type you may need to replace consumables before the end of the estimated lifetime Replacement toner cartridges are different from the supplied toner cartridges so the yield may also differ ll Toner Cartridges Supplied Toner Cartridges The average yield of the toner cartridge that comes with the machine is 1 700 sheets The average yield is based on ISO IEC 19752 the global standard related to Method for the determination of toner cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi function devices that contain printer components issued by ISO International Organization for Standardization when printing A4 size paper with the default print density setting Replacement Toner Cartridges For optimum print quality using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Average yield of toner cartridge Canon Cartridge 737 2 400 sheets NOTE When replacing toner cartridges How to Replace Toner Cartridges LINKS Q Replacing Toner Cartridges 311 336 OL40 09S Manuals Included with the Machine The manuals listed below are included with the machine Refer to them as necessary Read this manual first It describes
218. n to the previous screen When entering text press to move the cursor to the left Press to decrease a setting value such as density for scanning copying etc BLA 1 key When specifying settings press to select the item above the currently selected item When changing setting values press to increase a value BIb 1 key When specifying settings press to proceed to the next screen When entering text press to move the cursor to the right 23 336 Press to increase a setting value such as density for scanning copying etc OC Wi key When specifying settings press to select the item below the currently selected item When changing setting values press to decrease a value PJ Clear key Press to delete the entered numbers and text M Back key Press to return to the previous screen If you press this key when specifying settings for example the settings are not applied and the display returns to the previous screen PI OK key Press to apply settings or specified details I8 Status Monitor key Press to check the status of printing or copy to view the usage history You can also check the status of the machine such as the remaining amounts of paper and toner or whether any errors occurred Display P Paper Setting key Press to select the paper you want to use or to set the size and type of paper loaded in the paper source Specifying Paper Size and Type 53 Numeric keys 0 9 ke
219. nate tres manuals en your computer you can dipl Ere rn aic 19 Ma wang tis CODD C Frag Diss paa 6 Read the License Agreement and click Yes to agree License Agrenment Please raged thes olera licen agreement complies and carefully before installing he srh pragrams SAPD shall b null aid ed with aahi a of That cogi cc A ard all me remaining provisions lareo shall remain in Tull Inere amd etes 71 ACENTA ELIGE BENT BY CLiCHING THE BUTTON IHDICATIHG YOUR ACCEPTANCE AS STATED BELCAN D STALLING THE SOFTWARE YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YDU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTODD IT AMO AGREE TD BE BOUND HY ITS TERME AND CONDTIONS YOU ALSO AGREE THAT THIS AGREEMENT 15 THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF AGREEBIENT BETWEEN YD4U AND CAMO CONCERPIHDG THE SUBJECT MATTER HEREOF ANT SUPERSEDES ALL PROPOR 5 OR PRIDE AGREEMENTS VERBAL OR WPITTEN AND ANY OTHER COMMUNICATIONS Be TEEN YOU AND CANON RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER HEREOF HD AMENDMENT TO THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE EFFECTIVE UNLESS EHGHED BY CILY AUTHORISED REPRESENTATIVE OF CAHDRN Should goa heave ar questions conceming this pegsmerg ar ara desire In canzarct Canon Nor is reas plasse wirtle in Caps ases aubsicierg or Cee Seg Lea Cour A pod cboaingd m Produces Hoc do Saga Ta antag tie dares Ol is agaimi click Tras Ta dedine he home offs agreement dick Toi Ta usa his pragram bha Derims Of Ens megane micri ba accep Bark j Click Next To connect the mac
220. nd dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption It is an open system in which business proprietors can participate voluntarily The targeted products are office equipment such as computers displays printers facsimiles and copiers The standards and logos are uniform among participating nations B IPv6 Ready Logo The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase 1 established by the IPv6 Forum B Wireless LAN Regulatory Informatio N zAEm Regulatory information Users in the European Union and other European countries MF212w includes Wireless LAN Module Model name AW NM383 This device complies with the essential requirements of the R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC R amp TTE Declaration of Conformity Wireless LAN Module Ce x Spole nost CANON INC t mto prohla uje ze za zen AW NM383 je v souladu se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi Cesky Czech E uU s nm ar prislusnymi ustanovenimi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Dansk Undertegnede CANON INC erkl rer herved at AW NM383 overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante Danish krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Deutsch Hiermit erkl rt CANON INC dass sich das Ger t AW NM383 in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden German Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet Eesti K esolevaga kinnitab CANON INC seadme AW NM383 vastavust direktiivi 1999 5 EU o
221. nded Survey Program and click Uninstall or Remove Q Lr k Lontol Panel Praia E Progam and Femur ba fii gue Jeon pimp Land Fare bireme Uninstall or change a program Here retailed pair Te urimakali a pezrparm mie from tha ini ard tham chick Lieamatell Chang or Pagar He Tum ar Titers on ar E w 2 6 arr eb Timen Laver Prsten ieinter Fin Eslerded Surer Program dcman MF Toob 311 el Dg T erer Shrin 3 CARON INC Pensieri versns 12 11 Booed a i The uninstaller starts 4 Click OK Uninstalling the Toner Status 1 Log on to the computer with an administrator account 2 Display Programs and Features or Add or Remove Programs Displaying Programs and Features or Add or Remove Programs 3 Select Toner Status and click Uninstall or Remove 34 47 Hr a e seeren Frega ma rates Uninstall or change a program Te umisskall a pecgearn mie frorn tha fet arid than click Lieieatall Change or aai Pubiniar Canon MEG aH ll ee ee camem a CARON INE Paodert versions TNE S The uninstaller starts Z Click Uninstall D click OK 35 47 0L90 00E Troubleshooting If you encounter problems during installation or uninstallation of the MF Drivers and MF Toolbox see the following sections before contacting Canon Q Trouble with Installation GO Trouble with Uninstallation GO Trouble after Upgrading the Operating System Trouble with Installatio
222. ne Specifications Wireless LAN Specifications MF212w Document Type Q Scan Area Paper 9 Copy Specifications Q Scanner Specifications Printer Specifications 301 336 OL40 099 Machine Specifications Type Personal Desktop Power 220 to 240 V 50 60 Hz Supply 1 Power requirements differ depending on the country in which you purchased the product Maximum 1 270 W Average consumption during standby mode Approx 5 4 W Average consumption during sleep mod Power MF212w Consumption Approx 1 6 W by Wired Connections Approx 2 0 W by Wireless Connections MF211 Approx 1 6 W When the power switch is turned OFF 0 5 W or less MF212w Warm up 13 5 seconds or less Time 2 MF211 12 0 seconds or less MF212w Approx 10 8 kg Weight 3 MF211 Approx 10 7 kg Dimensions 390 x 371 x 312 mm W x L x H Environmental Temperature 10 to 30 C Conditions Humidity 20 to 80 RH no condensation MF212w 100BASE TX 10BASE T Host Hi Speed USB Interface IEEE 802 11b g n Infrastructure mode MF211 Hi Speed USB Acceptable DOCU SIE Supported Document Types Acceptable Paper Stock QPaper Printable Range Printable Area Scan Range 2 Scan Area 1 The current value displayed on the rating label indicates average current consumption 2 Warm up time is an interval between when the machine is turned ON and when the main screen appears on the display Warm up time may vary depending on
223. neath the symbol shown above in accordance with the Battery Directive this indicates that a heavy metal Hg Mercury Cd Cadmium Pb Lead is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive This product should be handed over to a designated collection point e g on an authorized one for one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment EEE and batteries and accumulators Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources For more information about the recycling of this product please contact your local city office waste authority approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www canon europe com weee or www canon europe com battery E International ENERGY STAR Program As an ENERGY STAR Partner Canon Inc has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR Program for energy efficiency The International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is an international program that promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other office equipment ENERGY STAR The program backs the development a
224. nected to the network are displayed Select this machine in this step IMPORTANT Printer Options is not displayed on applications that do not support AirPrint You cannot print by using those applications 5 Specify the print settings as necessary Number of copies Tap or on the right side of 1 Copy to set the number of copies 94 336 Range Tap Range and All Pages or specify the range of the pages to print when printing a document with multiple pages NOTE The available settings on Printer Options differ depending on the application you are using Available paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using 6 Tap Print a Printing starts To cancel printing Canceling AirPrint Printing NOTE Checking the print status During the printing process the Print Center icon is displayed in the list of recently used applications on the Apple device and you can use it to check the print status To display the list of recently used applications press the Home button twice Printing from Macintosh NOTE To install security functionality in AirPrint set a key pair and a digital certificate before using TLS Encrypting Communication of Print Data for Apple Devices with TLS QGConfiguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certificates 1 Add the machine to your Macintosh with System Preferences Print amp Scan 2 Make sure that the machine is turned ON and is connected to the L
225. ner consumption when copying Copy Offt On m 53 Adjustment Maintenance p Toner Save p Copy p On p b E NOTE When set to On Fine lines and portions with lighter print density may become blurred If the print results on special types of paper are not satisfactory the following settings may improve the quality of the printouts Special Mode U E43 If toner appears splattered around text and patterns in a printout select lt On gt Offt On n Adjustment Maintenance p lt Special Processing gt lt Special Mode U gt On ks D NOTE When set to On Print quality can be affected by the type of paper especially lightweight paper and the printing environment especially high humidity 239 336 Special Mode V a Adjust this setting if the print paper curls or wrinkles E lt Adjustment Maintenance gt p lt Special Processing gt lt Special Mode V gt Select the mode p OK Special Mode v Effect less Effect more NOTE To enable the setting This setting is enabled in the following conditions The paper size is set to lt B5 gt A5 lt STMT gt or EXEC Paper Type is set to Plain Plain L gt Recycled Color or Envelope After the setting is enabled Print speed is slower Special Mode Z Ea Adjust this setting if streaks adhere to the print paper E
226. ng Using MF Toolbox Q Scanning Using an Application 134 336 OL40 04Y Configuring Scan Settings in Advanced Mode If you click the Advanced Mode tab on the ScanGear MF screen you can make more advanced adjustments in the image quality than you can in Simple Mode You can also register adjusted settings as Favorite Settings For more detailed information click the icon next to the topic uie ase e HI z cope zm Mosa Dat ad Soldar Hoe Farina Ceara Hora Grain Cowection bone 99 Haa Urzharz H mal L lire Decem Q Operating Preview Images QSpecifying Settings for Documents and Color Mode Specifying Resolution and Image Size Q Adjusting Image Quality Q Adjusting Brightness and Color QSpecifying Other Settings Q Registering Frequently Used Settings If you place the document on the platen glass and click Preview a preview image is displayed You can specify the area you want to scan and check the effects of image adjustments on the preview image f doom eae m amp Clear Clears the preview image 3 Crop Specifies the cropping area with the cropping frame Click and drag the area you want to crop The cropping area is indicated with a dotted line You can move the cropping frame or change its size with your mouse NOTE Setting multiple scanning areas You can specify cropping areas in the document so tha
227. ng errors can occur when the IP address of the machine has been changed or when a printer has been added via the Windows printer folder These errors are typically caused by incorrect printer port settings For example an incorrect port number or port type may have been specified In such situations your attempt to print fails because the document data cannot reach the machine To fix this type of problem configure the printer port settings on the computer IMPORTANT To perform the following procedure log on to your computer with an administrator account 1 Open the printer folder Displaying the Printer Folder 2 Right click your printer icon and click Printer properties or Properties gt a acrT Central Panel e Hardware and Sound Diecicer and Printers bp egrt Devices ong Pent r1 e 0 Add a davicn Add a ponter See what s paran Manage defekt prir ars gt Devices 2 a Printers and Faxes 3 Canon Canen ienet Bees ene S Deem E See whaia printing y Canon MEJLO Series State P Deish Category Printer Hadek Canen MEZ2IO Seneca Salus D decumas in queue Sy Canon kIF2LU Seren Print to thafcliceang poria Documenta vall print tz the Foot fran checked port Port Description Ernte O F_B S ncbesd TCP TP Pot IE TEST Standard TEFAF Port local Part Mirmo P5 Document Winter le Port Lical Port PfPart CPFPaon Deter comieron rable biclr
228. ng the System Manager PIN System Management Settings IBTdj lt Initialize All Data Settings gt Ri Yes RIA gt lt Yes gt gt RA gt Restart the machine 291 336 OL40 092 Appendix This chapter contains technical specifications of this machine instructions on how to use the e Manual disclaimers copyright information and other important information for customers 292 336 OL40 093 Feature Highlights Give the features that are described in this section The features are grouped under four headings Going Green and Saving Money Improving Efficiency Going Digital and So Much More 293 336 OL40 094 Going Green and Saving Money Easy on the environment easy on your wallet There are lots of ways to cut back on paper toner power and expenses Print Multiple Pages on a Single Sheet To really start saving paper shrink multiple pages onto a single sheet 2 or 4 pages for copies and up to 16 pages for print jobs sent from your computer To copy multiple pages of a document onto one sheet Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet 2 on 1 4 on 1 To save paper when you copy Using the Paper Save Copy Key MF211 To print multiple pages of a document onto one sheet Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet Sleep Mode For saving energy and money a sleep mode that powers down a machine when nobody is using it has become an essential feature This ma
229. ngs 2 159 336 NOTE If an error message is displayed during setup Press Rf check whether the specified settings are correct and return to step 5 9 Check that the Wi Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel The Wi Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected When the setup is completed the screen below is displayed and approximately 2 seconds later the Wi Fi indicator lights up Connected Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed IMPORTANT Signal strength When more than one wireless router is available for connection the machine connects to the device with the strongest signal Signal strength is measured using RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication NOTE Reducing power consumption You can set the machine to enter Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless router Power Save Mode If the IP address of the machine has changed In a DHCP environment the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically If this happens the connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet LINKS 2 Connecting to a Wireless LAN 160 336 OL40 059 Checking the SSID and Network Key When manually setting up a wireless connection you need to specify the SSID and network key of your wireless router The SSID and network key may be indicated on these networking devices Ch
230. ns to solve the problem The screen displayed when a paper jam occurs is shown below as an example When an Error Message Appears 28 336 Paper jammed Lift control panel Press gt to display steps LINKS QUsing the Operation Panel 29 336 OL40 00K Using the Operation Panel Use the keys shown below to specify settings and adjust values JKL 8 TUV 0 Using A V m Scrolling the screen The scroll bar is displayed on the right side of the screen when not all of the information fits on one screen If the scroll bar is displayed use A W to scroll up or down The text and background colors of an item are inverted when it is selected Density 0 Original Type Text opy Ratio 100 1 ll Changing a setting value Use A W when entering numbers You can also enter the value directly using the numeric keys when the numeric key icon is displayed in the top left corner of the screen as shown below Entering Text Auto Reset Time off 1 9 NOTE The numbers in parentheses beneath the value input field indicate the range of possible values Using 44 gt m Proceeding to next screen Returning to previous screen Press to lj proceed to the next screen Press to f return to the previous screen Network settings Quiet Mode T1me Output Reports Date Time Settings Preferences Auto Sleep Time Timer Settings Auto Reset Time NOTE You can also proceed to the next screen
231. nual feed slot when you want to temporarily use a type of paper different from that which is loaded in the paper drawer Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot F Paper drawer Load the type of paper you frequently use into the paper drawer Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer Platen glass Place documents to copy or scan here Placing Documents 18 336 OL40 009 Back Side g Rating label The label shows the serial number which is needed when making inquiries about the machine When a Problem Cannot Be Solved FI USB port Connect a USB cable when connecting the machine and a computer For connection steps see Getting Started Manuals Included with the Machine F3 LAN port MF212w Connect a LAN cable when connecting the machine to a wired LAN router etc For connection steps see Getting Started Manuals Included with the Machine F3 Power socket Connect the power cord For connection steps see Getting Started 9 Manuals Included with the Machine 19 336 OL40 00A Interior 3 Operation panel Lift this panel to replace the toner cartridges or clear paper jams How to Replace Toner Cartridges Clearing Jams FI Toner cover Open this cover to replace the toner cartridges or clear paper jams How to Replace Toner Cartridges Clearing Jams Paper exit guide Open this guide to clear paper jams Q Clearing Jams LINKS Q How to Replace Toner Cartridges 20 336 OL40 00C Manual Feed Slot
232. o not need to input anything M End User Mode You can check the status of documents or the machine and you can also change some of the settings If you wish to delete your print documents enter the user name of the documents in User Name The user name is automatically set to print documents based on information such as your computer name or computer logon name mWhen a System Manager PIN is set Enter the registered System Manager PIN G Setting the System Manager PIN Z Click Log In Portal Page main page will be displayed Remote UI Screens 210 336 4 m Ty enr AED IS oo den ms Vd Yer o Farnese ash Help Lad pidh sd TATAP PST PME A nece arik Tecra reet Fiir Reedy imper camur dB Era oe Hre mma rem saaemosf ilr reor Hirn up Lapeer Seed p intonat Paper Laveri Paper ure Feer Typa ITA Pipe 115 e 0 Pc iTA Pisin 15 Dh Buai ih Pad 211 336 0LA40 06S Remote UI Screens This section describes the typical screens of the Remote UI Portal Page Main Page Status Monitor Cancel Page Settings Registration Page Portal Page Main Page B ep DES on 1c oen bw F e kii Vers haa Teak bal Tenes Bere Tefera rene ns Printer dM Eradykn pere bimer di Reedy ie ono ere Ando remain Peace Deng Mg Dow Pisani i16 a ng a Pure Cogeraht Cabin JHC 21 L5 3 Log Out Logs off from the Remote UI The Login page will be displayed
233. o 5t to 60 min m lt Timer Settings gt Auto Offline Time Set the time period E Set a timer to automatically shut down the machine after the specified period of idle time has elapsed since the machine entered the sleep mode Setting Auto Shutdown Time O Auto Shutdown is disabled 1 to 4t to 8 hr 234 336 OL40 075 Copy Settings All the settings about the copy are listed with short descriptions Default settings are marked with a dagger t copy Settings Scan Settings Printer Settings Adjustment Maintena Q Change Default Settings Correct Density You can change the factory default settings about copy The selected settings are used as the default settings of the copy function Q Changing Default Settings Number of Copies 1t to 99 Density 4 to Ot to 4 Auto Density Original Type Text Text Photo High Speed t Text Photo Photo Copy Ratio Custom Ratio 100 1 1 t 400 Max 200 141 A5 gt A4 70 A4 gt A5 50 25 Min Noni Off t 2o0on 1 4 on i ID Card Copy Select Layout Collate Off t On Sharpness Seven Levels Specify the initial copy density You can also change the copy density temporarily Adjusting Density 4 to Ot to 4 m Copy Settings p Correct Density p Adjust the density b E 235 336 0L40 0AA Scan Settings All the settings about the scan are listed with short descriptions Default s
234. o be edited with a word processing application To create a searchable PDF select 300 dpi for Image Quality OQ Configuring Scan Settings 129 336 Text Language Select the language that matches the document PDF Compression Select the level of the data compression If you select High the data size of images such as photographs or illustrations are reduced more than if you select Standard However the image quality may degrade depending on the document type Mi Save Scanned Image to Click Browse and specify the save destination for the scanned data If you select PDF Add Page for Save as Type 13 Save Scanned Image to is switched to Create PDF File Based On In this case specify an existing PDF file to which you want to add the newly scanned document data The data is added to the existing file as additional pages Adding Pages to an Existing PDF file A Save Pictures to a Subfolder with Current Date If you select the Save Pictures to a Subfolder with Current Date check box a subfolder named with the scanning date is created in the folder specified in Save Scanned Image to M and the data is saved to that folder Specifying External Applications to Forward Scanned Data If you specify an application to which you want to forward the scanned data the specified application automatically starts when scanning is complete For example you can specify Adobe Photoshop or other image processing applicati
235. ollows Starting from MF Toolbox When scanning from MF Toolbox you can call ScanGear MF and configure advanced scan settings Select the Display the Scanner Driver check box and click Start in MF Toolbox to start ScanGear MF Scanning Using MF Toolbox Starting from an application You can use ScanGear MF to load the scanned image into Adobe Photoshop Microsoft Office Word or other image processing and word processing applications Select ScanGear MF from the scan commands Q Scanning Using an Application TIPS You can do the following by using ScanGear MF Previewing the image before scanning Specifying the scanning area Adjusting the detailed image quality Configuring Scan Settings in Simple Mode Configuring Scan Settings in Advanced Mode 132 336 OL40 04X Configuring Scan Settings in Simple Mode Simple Mode is a collection of basic scan settings in ScanGear MF designed for easy operation In other words Simple Mode is a digest version of ScanGear MF Configure settings in the order indicated from to on the screen and click Scan By doing so you can configure basic settings and scan Haeo Click Preview te deplag tha preview image Preview area You can preview the document that is placed on the platen glass If you click Preview a preview image is displayed in this area and the cropping frame is displayed with a dotted line 5 Toolbar Control the image in the pr
236. on If you select Mail for the type of scan and specify an e mail application the scanned data is automatically attached to a new e mail message To scan with OCR selected you must specify an OCR software Fenn Taras the somre imager to che sesecied haida 9 B sere al oan Dating Seleci Sprea Pater ona Paper Spe Laim J Scan lada Cria Iresge uelit EX z Fiep ha birah Dt e Baron Scared rugas iz Eh Hyer Boal ava an Tour POF POF Stings Seve canc ress kx a Pe 0 lees s Sen Miei bos ufokdor yh Dune Isis A Delete If you do not want to forward the scanned document to an application such as when you want to save it click this button Set Click this button and select an application Alternatively you can specify an application by dragging its icon here if it is not an e mail application NOTE Supported e mail applications Microsoft Outlook Express Microsoft Outlook Microsoft Exchange EUDORA Netscape Messenger Windows Mail Becky Ver 2 Mozilla Thunderbird LINKS QScanning Using MF Toolbox 130 336 OL40 04U Scanning Using an Application Scan the document by using an application You can use Adobe Photoshop Microsoft Office Word or other image processing and word processing applications The scanned image is directly loaded in the application allowing you to edit or process the image immediately The following procedure
237. oner according to the following whenever you want to It is recommended that you check the level before you start to print a large job m Device Status OK Cartridge Level gt p OK Check the toner level gg 280 336 Cartridge Level eh Toner Level Displays the amount of remaining toner Depending on the environment in which your machine is located other internal parts may reach the end of their lifetime before the toner runs out LINKS Consumables 281 336 0LA40 08C Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge Perform the following before replacing the toner cartridge The message may no longer appear or print quality may be improved Review cautions for handling the toner cartridge before starting Maintenance and Inspections Consumables il Lift the operation panel NOTE If you cannot lift the operation panel Make sure the platen glass cover is completely closed If a thick original such as a book is placed on the platen glass remove the original Forcing the operation panel up may cause damage 2 Open the toner cover by the grip at the front right of the toner cover 3 Pull the toner cartridge out of the machine 4 Shake the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times as shown below to evenly distribute the toner inside the cartridge 5 Install the toner cartridge a Align the right and left projections with the toner cartridge guides and push securely all the way in 282 336
238. oration i nigris reserees Service Pick L i Vou Werke Expesence Indes needs bo be nefeeshed AMA Athenee dd 3 Deal Cose Premer BERI 20K Ce 2I C IO FT Gen ie re avasdlable for tis Diep Compube nasse demain and workgroups delbieqa Comgpuser names an a Full computer narra a amp Compute deseri por Wipricgrogpr WORKGRORE charge setting B Viewing the Computer Name Windows XP Server 2003 Server 2003 R2 328 336 1 Start select Control Panel 2 Display the System screen Click Performance and Maintenance System 3 Click the Computer Name or Network ID tab 4 Click Change or Properties Computer Hame Changes You can change the name and Ihe membership of ie computer Changes mag affect access bo meivak resouices Damart i G workgioup W RKGR OUP Windows Vista 7 8 8 1 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 1 Display Control Panel Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Start select Control Panel Windows 8 Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen select Control Panel Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 Right click Start select Control Panel 2 Display System Windows Vista 7 8 8 1 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 Click System and Security or System and Maintenance System Windows Server 2008 Double click System ll Checking the LPR RAW Printer Port 1 Open the print
239. ork with a usemarne and paiseesrd 3r feri Comp ubi can print d i Tha printi will net be salable when the comparer deeper To charge these metti nga use the Meheork and Shasng Carter V Bender peri jobs on chenj computers rere H Ein porter ix shared with wer cenning SrHurard vanin of Wadea y ena Say renee le arial addiiosal directs do thal the iper do siyi hase qo Tid the print deer mete Tey connect qoe Thee shed porter Adinia Drives NOTE When Change Sharing Options is displayed Click Change Sharing Options If the User Account Control dialog box appears click Yes or Continue 179 336 M M i anon UM Wd j Tf you share this printer only users on your network with a m and password for this computer can print to it The printe Share this printer Bender mnnt wc con client cover tare 4 Install additional drivers as necessary lt This operation is required if you want to install MF Drivers in other computers running a different bit architecture via the print server Click Additional Drivers 2 Select the check box for the bit architecture that other computers are running and click OK Wau can impa adie rad derer so thn ucen on Ete dollcsing sche can doveioad Gham air match mban ay comet Fiacika Filid Ann T pe per Pal neis Typa 3 var Pida Tae 3 gt Uses Mide Select additional drivers from the following a
240. ot correctly configured if it is displayed as 0 0 0 0 Connecting the machine to a switching hub or bridge may result in a connection failure even when the IP address is correctly configured This problem can be solved by setting a certain interval before the machine starts communicating Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network You can print a list of the current network settings Output Report Viewing IPv4 Settings m Network Information b lt IPV4 gt p 3 Select the setting to view OK IP Address IP Address 192 168 0 215 Subnet Mask Gateway Address Host Name Viewing IPv6 Settings m Network Information b lt IPVG gt OK Select the setting to view Link Local Address IP Address Link Local Address IP Address fe80 0000 0000 0000 Stateless Address 1 0123 4567 89ab cdef Stateless Address 2 Stateless Address 3 Stateless Address 4 Stateless Address 5 Stateless Address 6 Statefull Address Default Router Addr Viewing the MAC Address 1 Press W 2 Use A W to select Network Settings and press J If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press EA Setting the System Manager PIN 3 Select Ethernet Driver Settings and press JA 169 336 Network settings Ethernet Driver Set SNMP Settings Auto Detect Decicated Port Sett Waiting Time for Co Ethernet Driver Sett Viewing Wirele
241. p rEmw JE iat hatter amas AT Soe Satie Lir Phe fede Fie Garbage Pah Tash le me um o Xs Hacc Denis ai ies Bieri LM markari Erare V Wert Pa rines 1A Prd efr Z Click Edit in Proxy Settings M epo HPS n neben Epp etm A a E I Fie kE You Freee Teh Help Hie P se ENTA on TLS Zeb Cina aay asd Epia iay ora Derinin Letra Sat settings thot men s Bark Imi p D Select the Use Proxy check box and specify the required settings 204 336 Common LO DC 28 D Use Proxy Select the check box to use the specified proxy server when communicating with an HTTP server HTTP Proxy Server Address Enter the address of the proxy server Specify the IP address or host name depending on the environment HTTP Proxy Server Port Number Change the port number as necessary Enter a number between 1 and 65535 Use Proxy within Same Domain Select the check box to use a proxy server specified in the same domain Use Proxy Authentication To enable authentication by the proxy server select the check box and enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the user name in the User Name text box Set Change Password To set or change the password for the proxy authentication when it is enabled select the check box and enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the new password in the Password text box 6 Click rok Restart the machine Turn OFF the machine wa
242. page of the scanned document For example if you scan a three page document three separate one page PDF files are created One PDF file is created from multiple documents For example if you scan a three page document one three page PDF file is created Newly scanned document data is added as additional pages to an existing PDF file that you specify Q Adding Pages to an Existing PDF file Available file formats for each scan type Ea Scan type Mail OCR Save PDF Color Scan B amp W Scan Custom 1 Custom 2 BMP SOs NIN UN v JPEG EXIf vC vC vC v di 4C TIFF NISN NIN SN v PDF NINISN v PDF Single Page PDF Multiple Pages PDF Add Page v Not available if Scan Mode is set to Black and White or Black and White OCR 3 Configuring Scan Settings If a message indicating the image size is too large is displayed Lower the Image Quality value Configuring Scan Settings A PDF Settings If you select PDF PDF Single Page PDF Multiple Pages or PDF Add Page for Save as Type 43 you can configure advanced settings for PDF files 7 Crete 2 exc hable POF Ta Larry EDF Caregen EL E Hgh Create Searchable PDF Specify whether you want to convert the scanned document into a searchable PDF Characters in the scanned document are converted into text data and the text can be searched using a computer Text can als
243. peat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages When there is only one page to be scanned proceed to the next step 4 Use A V to select Finish Scanning and press JA The save destination folder is displayed on the computer NOTE About the save destination folder amp By default the scanned data is saved to the Pictures or My Pictures folder A subfolder named with the scanning date is created and the data is saved to that folder amp To change the save destination see 2 Configuring Storing Settings LINKS Q Scanning from the Machine 119 336 OL40 04L Scanning from a Computer There are two ways to scan from a computer using MF Toolbox and using an application such as an image processing or word processing application Scanning Using MF Toolbox MF Toolbox is an application included with the machine that enables you to scan documents or images to a computer You can forward the scanned data to a specified application or attach it to an e mail message Scanning Using an Application You can scan images by using an application such as a word processing or image processing application and load the images directly into the application You do not need to start another application to scan 120 336 OL40 04R Scanning Using MF Toolbox You can save scanned documents to a computer forward them to a specified application to edit them or attach them to an e mail message MF
244. per source Cartridge Level Displays the amount of toner remaining Depending on the environment in which your machine is located other internal parts may reach the end of their lifetime before the toner runs out Check Counter Displays the totals for printouts Viewing the Counter Value A Status of copy print jobs Displays the current status of the selected item The Copy Job Status screen is shown below as an example Copy Job Status Cancel Job Number 0013 Status Copying Time 08 01 01 22 PM Number of Orig 15 SheetxCopy 15x 4 6 Copy Ratio 100 Paper 4 Plain M Network Information MF212w Displays the network settings such as the IP address of the machine and status such as the condition of wireless LAN communications Network Information IPv4 IPv6 wireless LAN Informa Q Viewing Network Settings When a Message Is Displayed Messages are displayed at the top of the screen in situations such as when toner level is low or when a cover is left open The display alternates between showing the normal screen and the message Copy Press Start No Paper Drawer 1 1006 8 4 1 Ad Plain Density 0 Load paper Original Type Text Cancel 00000 Copy Ratio 100 1 Resumes When an Error Message Appears When an Error Occurs In some cases when an error occurs instructions on how to respond to the error are displayed Follow the on screen instructio
245. platen glass and result in injury Laser beam This machine is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product under IEC 60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 The laser beam can be harmful to the human body The laser beam is confined in the laser scanner unit by a cover so there is no danger of the laser beam escaping during normal machine operation Read the following remarks and instructions for safety Never open covers other than those indicated in this manual Do not remove the caution label attached to the cover of the laser scanner unit If you operate the machine in manners other than the control adjustment and operating procedures prescribed in this manual this may result in hazardous radiation exposure If the laser beam should escape and enter your eyes exposure may cause damage to your eyes 10 336 IMPORTANT When transporting the machine To prevent damage to the machine during transport perform the following Remove the toner cartridges Securely pack the machine in the original box with packing materials Other precautions Follow the instructions in the caution label attached to this machine Avoid shaking or applying shock to this machine Do not forcibly open and close doors covers and other parts Doing so may result in damage to the machine Do not touch the contacts 3 Doing so may result in damage to the machine Do not turn OFF the machine during printing Also do not open and close th
246. press JA Clean Fixing Assembly Load A4 LTR size or larger in MP tray After cleaning is completed and the message Finished appears press to return to the copy mode screen 277 336 OL40 089 Machine Interior Clean the interior of the machine regularly so that toner paper dust does not collect 1 Turn OFF the machine and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet When you turn OFF the machine data that is waiting to be printed is deleted 2 Lift the operation panel NOTE If you cannot lift the operation panel Make sure the platen glass cover is completely closed If a thick original such as a book is placed on the platen glass remove the original Forcing the operation panel up may cause damage 3 Open the toner cover by the grip at the front right of the toner cover 4 Pull the toner cartridge out of the machine 5 Using a lint free clean soft dry cloth wipe away toner paper dust from the inside 6 Install the toner cartridge a Align the right and left projections 3 with the toner cartridge guides and push securely all the way in 278 336 Close the toner cover and lower the operation panel NOTE If you cannot close the toner cover Make sure that the toner cartridge is inserted properly Forcing it closed may cause damage 8 Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine 279 336 OL40 08A Replacing Toner Cartridges The machine will display a message
247. pulling it out keep pulling until it is completely removed Install the toner cartridge a Align the right and left projections 3 with the toner cartridge guides and push securely all the way in 8 Close the toner cover and lower the operation panel NOTE If you cannot close the toner cover Make sure that the toner cartridge is inserted properly Forcing it closed may cause damage LINKS Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge 285 336 0LA40 08F Relocating the Machine The machine is heavy Make sure to follow the procedures below when moving the machine to avoid injury and also make sure to read the safety precautions before you begin Important Safety Instructions 1 Turn OFF the machine and computer When you turn OFF the machine data that is waiting to be printed is deleted 2 Disconnect the cables and cord from the machine in numerical order as in the illustration below Whether the cables with are connected depends on your environment M Power plug F Power cord g USB cable LAN cable 3 When transporting the machine across a long distance remove the toner cartridges How to Replace Toner Cartridges 4 Open the paper cover and remove any paper If the paper guides are extended return them so that they fit in the paper drawer 5 Close all the open covers and move the machine to the new location Check how heavy the machine is and carry it without straining Machine Specificat
248. r Windows XP Right click Start select Explorer All Users Start Menu Programs delete the Canon folder Windows Vista Right click Start select Explorer All Users Programs in Start Menu delete the Canon folder Windows 7 Start select All Programs delete the Canon folder Trouble after Upgrading the Operating System Cannot use the software after upgrading the operating system Reinstall the software after uninstalling the software Uninstalling QG Installing 36 47 0L90 00H Appendix The Appendix provides information you should know such as how to use the Installation Guide disclaimers and copyright information 37 47 OL90 00S Using the Installation Guide The Installation Guide is a manual that can be viewed on your computer It provides information about the installation of drivers You can find pages quickly by searching for what you want to do or by entering keywords How to Find the Topic You Are Looking For You can find the page you are looking for using the following three methods Search the contents You can find the page you are looking for by selecting a topic from the Contents tab on the left side of the screen or by selecting a chapter icon from the icons next to the topics Top Page Topic Page Search by keyword You can search by entering keywords such as USB or environment Pages containing the keywords are disp
249. r plug and then disconnect all the interface cables and power cord from the machine Otherwise the power cord or interface cables may be damaged resulting in a fire or electrical shock Do not use near any medical equipment Radiowaves emitted from this machine may interfere with medical equipment which may cause a malfunction and result in serious accidents If any foreign substance falls into this machine unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and contact your local authorized Canon dealer CAUTION Do not install in the following locations The machine may drop or fall resulting in injury Unstable location Location exposed to vibrations Other cautions When carrying this machine follow the instructions in this manual If carried improperly it may fall resulting in injury When installing this machine be careful not to get your hands caught between the machine and the floor or walls or between the paper drawers Doing so may result in injury A location subject to dramatic changes in temperature or humidity A location near equipment that generates magnetic or electromagnetic waves A laboratory or location where chemical reactions occur A location exposed to corrosive or toxic gases A location that may warp from the weight of the machine or where the machine is liable to sink a carpet etc 7 336 This machine generates a slight amount of ozone etc during normal use Although sensitivity to ozone e
250. rawings that have many fine lines High Definition Text Suitable when printing documents that have small characters NOTE To specify detailed settings for each item selected on Objective click Advanced Settings For more information click Help on the printer driver screen LINKS Q Printing a Document 85 336 OL40 042 Saving Toner You can set the printer driver to print documents using less toner IMPORTANT When the toner save setting is enabled fine lines and portions with lighter print density may become blurred Quality tab Select the document type in Objective Click Advanced Settings Select Toner Save in the Advanced Settings screen Select On from the drop down list OK OK so cl Somen ea BUTS Gace apu J Besos Desain I CC em Cm Objective QSelecting Document Type Select the document type for which you want to enable the toner save setting M Advanced Settings A screen with settings is displayed Click Toner Save and select On from the drop down list on the bottom of the screen NOTE You can specify whether to enable the toner save setting for each document type Specify the toner save setting for each document type listed in Objective In the Advanced Settings screen you can specify various print settings other than toner save settings For more information click Help on the printer driver screen
251. rch l unchiares such as 25 kE keyword searches and fulHes searches m i Manuals m Thesa are ha manuals for fie dekoa Hyou ircziall he maniak on ycor compiler you can is play hemah but ETS using Iis CODD i C Fiag DinkSparg 314 336 D Read the License Agreement and click Yes to agree License Agreement Fiesse read te daliwing loans agreseman compels and Carefully bakire installing the orbana pr grams FANON BDETWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT E i F This isa kpl ageeement Agreement bebreen you and Canon Inc Canon mni gremi your vss of Canon s snis m mogems including the related manuais o any printed materil thereal itha SOFTWARE Far cerimin Canon s coggmg maa piara and maltifunc tonss pariphie rai gie Prodi t READ CAREFULUF AMD UNDER ETAHI ALL OF THE FIGHTS AND RESTRICTIONS DESCREIED II THIE AGREEMENT BEFORE STALLING THE SOFTWARE BY CLICHIMIG THE BUTTON IHDICATING YONA ACCEPTANCE AS STATED BELOW OA INSTAT LING THE SOFTWARE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND EY THE TERS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS amp REEMEHT F OD DO NOT AGREE TO THE TDLLDAMENG TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS ACIELDBENT DO HOT USE THE SOrTNARE Canon grants pou a personal immed and nan exriustse boense va use Tu an used herein shall include siori beading inninilrag acce rsing executing nr Geplaying the SOFTVEUSE rolelg for the use with Products any nn computers directi pr wis MANE GHC Tn m Prodi fie Deeg ile Comprar You mag alike Oe de Of Othe COM
252. re be Desk Ej is Fartescrk A 2 ben 326 336 Bl Displaying the Software Programs Manuals Setup Screen If your computer does not display the Software Programs Manuals Setup screen after inserting the DVD ROM follow the procedure below The DVD ROM drive name is indicated as D in this manual The DVD ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer you are using Windows XP Server 2003 Server 2003 R2 1 Start select Run 2 Enter D MMinst exe and then click OK Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 1 Enter D Minst exe in Search programs and files or Start Search under the Start menu 2 Press the ENTER key Windows 8 Server 2012 1 Right click the lower left corner of the screen select Run 2 Enter D Minst exe and then click OK Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 1 Right click Start select Run 2 Enter D Minst exe and then click OK li Printing a Test Page in Windows You can check whether the printer driver is operational by printing a test page in Windows 1 Load A4 size paper in the manual feed slot Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot 2 Open the printer folder Displaying the Printer Folder 3 Right click your printer icon and click Printer properties or Properties in the pop up menu JOa r Central Panel amp Hardwere and bound Gerkes and Printers T l p Seerch Devices and Prin Fie dt Wiee Tools Heip Add a dra Add a paniar San what s p
253. ri aeu r uw using Tii CDD C Free Desk Spare T3581 HB Space Required iz Inz xil 344 HB 6 Read the License Agreement and click Yes to agree 10 47 License Agrenmment Please read the kreira license agreement camobeh and cantly before installing he stha programs SCD shall E null ard ed with raspect a of That cogi cr rribun dl ard all me remaining provisions lareo shall remain in Full Inere ard etes 71 ACCRA CAYLEE MENT BY CLC KING THE BUTTON INDICATING YOUR ACCEPTANCE 45 STATED BELOW Of STALLING THE SOFTWARE YOU ACKNOWLEGSE THAT YDU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTODD IT AMD GREE TD BE BDOND BY ITS TERME AHD CONDITIONE YOU ALSO AGREE THAT THIS AGREEMENT I3 THE COMPLETE AHD EXCLUSIUE STATEMENT OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN YD4 AMD CAMOW COUCERMNG THE SUBJECT MATTER HERE AMD SUPERSEDES ALL PROPOSALS OR PRIDE AGREEMENTS VERBAL OR WPITTEN AND ANY OTHER COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN YOU AND CANON RELATING TO THE SUBJECT BATTER HEREOF HD ABIEICIMEHT TO THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE EFFECTIVE UNLESS EIGHED BY DULY AUTHORISED REPRESENTATIVE OF CAHDRN Should goa hase ane questions conceming this pegemer ar Para desire In roria Canon Nor ir reser plasse mrle in Canb s abes dibadan ar Cee SoD Lea Cour A pos OT ed m Produces Holst Ta accel ing armes at fnis agaci click ras Ta dedine he home ol his agreement dick Hoc Ta usd his pragram Frei Derms Of Ens aurea meant misi D acted Bark j Click Next To connect the
254. ridges Is printing sometimes uneven when printing fine lines Change the setting for Special Mode J gt Q Special Processing 268 336 Is Correct Density in Copy Settings set too dark Adjust the setting so that density is lighter QSetting Menu List Is the printer installed where it is subject to direct sunlight or strong light Install the printer in an appropriate location QInstallation Q Relocating the Machine Was the toner cartridge been left in direct sunlight for a long period of time Store the toner cartridge in an appropriate location for two to three hours then try printing again This may solve the problem If the problem persists replace the toner cartridge Q Replacing Toner Cartridges Are you trying to scan a barcode printed with factory default settings In the printer driver specify Special Settings 1 for the setting of Special Print Mode QReplacing Toner Cartridges NOTE When set to Special Settings 1 print density is lighter compared with Off Text and lines may also appear faded White specks may appear in images printed on paper other than lightweight paper with this feature set to ON 269 336 OL40 080 Paper Creases or Curls Is paper loaded correctly If paper is not loaded below the load limit line or is loaded obliquely it may crease Q Loading Paper Are you using paper that has absorbed moisture R
255. ried 1 Open the platen glass cover 2 Place the document face down on the platen glass Align the corner of the document with the top left corner of the platen glass NOTE To scan transparent documents for example tracing paper or transparencies cover them with plain white paper 3 Gently close the platen glass cover The machine is ready to scan the document When scanning is complete remove the document from the platen glass 34 336 0LA40 00S Loading Paper You can load the paper into the paper drawer or manual feed slot Load the paper you usually use into the paper drawer The paper drawer is convenient when using large amounts of paper Use the manual feed slot when you temporarily use size or type of paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer See Paper for available paper sizes Paper Type and Setting for the Machine See the table below to specify the paper settings according to the type and weight of the paper to load into the paper source For more information about how to specify the paper settings on the machine see Specifying Paper Size and Type For the amount of paper that can be loaded in each paper source see Paper Paper Setting Paper Type Paper Weight MED Plain 60 90 g m Plain paper 60 to 90 g m Plain L 60 90 g m2 gt Recycled paper 60 to 90 g m Recycled Color paper 60 to 90 g m Color 90 to 120 g m Heavy 1 90 120 g m Heavy paper 120 to 163 g m
256. rint on this machine to encrypt communication between the machine and an Apple device with Transport Layer Security TLS TLS allows data to be encrypted and sent or received over the network To use TLS you need to specify a key pair and enable the TLS function Generate or install the key pair for TLS before enabling TLS Configuring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certificates al Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode Starting Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration AT ang Teach teed Pri Satter WA Tres Nr Correia at eta 5 Click Register Default Key on the right of the key pair you want to use 99 336 NOTE Viewing details of a certificate You can check the details of the certificate or verify the certificate by clicking the corresponding text link under Key Name or the certificate icon Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certificates 6 Enable TLS for the Remote UI Fiaratiog ee a FUNDIT Deme LR n Lib lod B Cop enia LFD Priest Catia E eee wh Rim Punt erga ATS en agp Samant Pong rigi HTTP eninge C Grem Based TLI Taia s TY FITL dum Serge ey See Ania orig lomaa ee alin Tre ip Corres af ao Trace Ce iver Satay Mieris LAM iHay ici Va eri Ain LA fete Gaye unus Saeed aire behai usw Recon Sees aire ale Peket ansi oer I 3 Select the Use TLS check box set required items and then click OK T ar iy Ere irp eo ee ee
257. rinting from a Computer When using the machine as a network printer you can configure the protocols and ports used for printing and create a print server for the machine Before configuring the machine for printing from a computer perform the basic setup procedures including the printer driver installation MF Driver Installation Guide NL LPD MITTTILLI NOTE Printing protocols are rules for delivering document data created on a computer to the machine and can be selected according to the printing purpose or the network environment amp Ports are gateways for passing document data from a computer to the printer Incorrect port settings are often the cause when documents cannot be printed from a network computer 172 336 0L40 05J Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions Configure the protocols that are used for printing documents from a networked computer The protocols supported by the machine include LPD RAW and WSD Web Services on Devices NOTE To change protocols port numbers see Changing Port Numbers MF212w 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode Starting Remote UI 2 Click Settings Registration Fis dk Yee Pecan Tesh Haig Cy Remote Ul Portal 1 Bee prie ee past eeM asina an GR fishes Mors Cal i mm Bmpirpanns GE Trinia Reedy pers mre mara remmen edere rm 3 Click Network Settings TCP IP Settings gt eee TT qm
258. rk scanner It is automatically installed along with the scanner driver The MF Toolbox provides a group of commands for you to open a scanned image in an application send it as an e mail attachment file store it on the hard disk etc This application informs you with the amount of cartridge consumption on the computer it is installed on pop up display You can also access a site for purchasing cartridges directly from the application Additional Software Programs Address Book Import Export Tool 2 Canon MF LBP Wireless Setup Assistant 2 Presto PageManager You can use Address Book Import Export Tool to export import an address book registered in the machine Address Book Import Export Tool is contained in the AddressBookTool folder on the User Software and Manuals CD ROM DVD ROM You can check the SSID the network key etc when connecting to a wireless LAN using Canon MF LBP Wireless Setup Assistant You can handle scanned images in many ways using this software 1 Fax driver may not be supplied depending on the model you are using 2 This software may not be supplied depending on your model or your country or region NOTE Depending on the operating system you are using some functions of the driver software included in the CD ROM DVD ROM may not be usable The newest software is posted on the Canon web site Please verify the operating environment etc and download the appropriate software if required
259. rver 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen y select Run enter D MMInst exe click OK Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 Right click Start select Run enter D MInst exe click OK ll Checking the Bit Architecture If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32 bit or 64 bit Windows follow the procedure below to check 1 Display Control Panel Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Start select Control Panel Windows 8 Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen select Control Panel Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 Right click Start select Control Panel 2 Display System Windows Vista 7 8 8 1 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 Click System and Security or System and Maintenance System Windows Server 2008 Double click System 3 Check the bit architecture 32 bit operating systems 32 bit Operating System is displayed 64 bit operating systems 64 bit Operating System is displayed 4 ed CPS amp Comici Panel Syramanii iacunt gt Sante mim P Himi n Corina Pare Home Mie basic iniormmatien about your computer BS Dese Monager Winia alitii Remote settings Wangan 7 Utrata Ej syrtem protection Copyrigh 2005 biora Coiperstion AE igbi resencedi Bg adane system settings Service Pack Birdos Exparmnicn bude ds AMD Ahiya fd X2 Dae Cose Processor DD 2 90 GHz Artic n Canter Ee anemony TR 200
260. ry Paper Creases or Curls Paper Is Fed Incorrectly When a Problem Cannot Be Solved Maintenance Cleaning the Machine Exterior Platen Glass Fixing Assembly Machine Interior Replacing Toner Cartridges 4 336 186 187 191 194 195 196 197 198 201 203 204 206 207 208 209 210 212 214 217 219 220 227 228 231 235 236 237 239 244 250 251 252 256 260 261 263 264 265 266 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 280 Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge How to Replace Toner Cartridges Relocating the Machine Viewing the Counter Value Initializing Settings Initializing Menu Initializing System Management Settings Initializing All Data Settings Appendix Feature Highlights Going Green and Saving Money Improving Efficiency Going Digital So Much More Specifications Machine Specifications Wireless LAN Specifications MF212w Document Type Scan Area Paper Copy Specifications Scanner Specifications Printer Specifications Consumables Manuals Included with the Machine Using e Manual Installing e Manual Uninstalling e Manual Screen Layout of e Manual Viewing e Manual Others Basic Windows Operations For Mac OS Users Notice Contact Us 5 336 282 284 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 297 299 301 302 303 304 305 306 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 317 319 324 325 326 331 332 336 OL40 000 Important Safety Instructions The cont
261. s are scanned in black and white only with no intermediate shades of gray NOTE To change settings You can change settings from MF Toolbox Configuring Scan Settings in MF Toolbox 115 336 6 Press A Scanning starts To cancel press p Yes p EA IMPORTANT You cannot scan while the MF Toolbox setup screen is displayed Close the screen Er aE ANIN before scanning a cae t a Sanne einga Select pure Pisten iac Peper Sie Litai a j Scan bade Cria Inege uel a0 d E Deploy the Essais Diei C Saree Scanned image be Ele Hares mial Save ac Iy POF POF Satine Seve Scanne d image bo ee Pe __ bese oa hares Pictures ioa bubioja yah Caneri hse M a pem Disg and dop ae appkc ation icon hma ts reia Sal IlConfanaton of fe Scanned Wage and Est Seating Bee de Corm EE If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned place the next document on the platen glass and press B Scan Next Press Start Finish scanning Cance Confirm Destination Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the pages When there is only one page to be scanned proceed to the next step 8 Select Finish Scanning and press A The save destination folder is displayed on the computer NOTE About the save destination folder amp By default the scanned data is saved to the Pictures or My Pictures folder A subfolder
262. s for the devices you are using or contact the device manufacturers ET Make sure that the network settings have been completed on the computer If the network has not been set up properly you will not be able to use the machine on the network even if you perform the rest of the procedure below NOTE Depending on the network you may need to change settings for the communication method half duplex full duplex or the Ethernet type 10BASE T 100BASE TX Configuring Ethernet Settings For more information contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator To check the MAC address of the machine see Viewing the MAC Address v Select wired or wireless LAN Q Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN 3 Connect to a wired or wireless LAN ch Proceed to the section that corresponds to the setting you selected in step 2 a a Connecting to a Wired LAN 9 Connecting to a Wireless LAN 146 336 Set the IP address as necessary This step is required when you want to assign a specific IP address to the machine or change the dynamic IP o addressing protocol from the default DHCP um OQ Setting IP Addresses 147 336 OL40 052 Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN After you decide on wired or wireless LAN to connect the machine to the computer select wired LAN or wireless LAN using the operation panel For how to connect to and specify settings for a wireless LAN wired LAN see Gett
263. s process alboagethvar amd ba r ady to go before yen knew H Drdey the lind ef dubter Ires and easy bo use document system thst you cam only get from wireless Compatible with IESE BOz 115 g n foc stress free wireless and also suppers WEP and WPA WPAZ FSK THIP AES OCMP for tighter sacurity o g Click to display the detailed information Click again to close the window Click to display the corresponding topic page Topic Page Contains information about how to configure and use the machine 320 336 Top Site Map Hele Print amp All tha settingi aut tha printer are lished with shart descriptions Default settings ane marked with 3 dagger tj kt CC Aint Spoad Imag Quality Priority Action When Paper S ze Mismatch Set wheather prasting gata Pead f a paper sins other than the sime loaded in the papar scarce j selected Tog emen set tie machine nar t go ahead with pining and instead display am alert messs ton then am Error Message Appears Farce Output Display Errart A Contents The chapter icons and titles are displayed mDaa The Contents tab can be widened and narrowed A Expand all Collapse all Click Expand all to display all of the subsections of all topics Click Collapse all to close all of the subsections of all the topics M Chapter icons Click a chapter icon to navigate to the top of the corresponding chapter A Topic page Displays the topics of the sele
264. s searching the network for these services 3 Check that lt Auto IP gt is set to lt On gt If Off is selected change the setting to On 4 Select Apply and press 3 164 336 NOTE IP addresses assigned via DHCP BOOTP RARP override the address obtained via Auto IP m Manually entering an IP address 1 Check that lt Auto Acquire gt is set to lt Off gt IP Address Settings Auto Acquire off Manually Acquire check Settings If On is displayed select Auto Acquire and set both Select Protocol and Auto IP to Off 2 Select Manually Acquire and press OK 3 Specify the IP address subnet mask and gateway address or default gateway Specify the settings in the following order IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address Enter each setting using the numeric keys and press sd on each screen IP Address Gateway Address 192 168 0 238 Apply Press OK Apply Press OK NOTE Checking whether the settings are correct Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer Starting Remote UI If a computer is not available you can check the connection by using the operation panel Testing the Network Connection Testing the Network Connection 1 Press E 2 Use A to select Network Settings and press J If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press OK f
265. screen By using the Remote UI you can register a variety of information including contact information Administrator comments the installation location of the machine as well as to the settings that you can register by using the operation panel The registered information can be viewed on the Device Information page of the Remote UI 2 Checking System Manager Information If a System Manager PIN is Set amp If you try to access Network Settings System Management Settings etc the following screen is displayed Enter the set PIN System Manager PIN amp Entering a PIN is also required when logging on in System Manager Mode in the Remote UI 8 OStarting Remote UI Sd Apply Press OK 196 336 0L40 063 Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls Without proper security unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are connected to a network To prevent this unauthorized access specify the settings for packet filter a feature that restricts communication to devices with specified IP addresses or MAC addresses 197 336 OL40 064 Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules You can either limit communication to only devices with specified IP addresses or block devices with specified IP addresses but permit other communications You can specify a single IP address or a range of IP addresses NOTE Up to 4 IP addresses or ranges of IP addresses ca
266. screen for entering a PIN is displayed Enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press fj G Setting the System Manager PIN Asterisks Settings marked with an asterisk have different defaults depending on the country or region of purchase Display Settings Language E3 Select the display language used for the display reports and lists Arabic Bulgarian Catalan Croatian Czech Danish Dutch Englisht Estonian Finnish French German Greek Hungarian Italian Latvian Lithuanian Norwegian Polish Portuguese Romanian Russian Slovak Slovene Spanish Swedish Turkish FI Preferences p Display Settings COK Language p Select a language fbi i Remote UI Language E3 Select the display language used for the Remote UI screens Czech Danish Dutch Englisht Finnish French German Hungarian Italian Norwegian Polish Portuguese Russian Spanish Swedish Turkish Preferences p Display Settings OK Remote UI Language p Select a language E Contrast Ea Adjust the brightness of the display to suit the installation location of the machine Five Levels 228 336 brightness Ne 4di Preferences ga Display Settings Contrast p Use p gt to adjust the Invert Screen Colors Select On to invert the display colors Select On if the display is hard to view even after the brightness
267. se A W to select Network Settings and press EJ s If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press OK f Setting the System Manager PIN 3 Select Wireless LAN Settings and press fj If the Enable the wireless LAN message is displayed select Yes and press E 4 Read the message that is displayed and press EJ D Select SSID Settings and press A Wireless LAN Setti WPS Push Button Mode WPS PIN Code Mode SSID Settings Power Save Mode 6 Select Select Access Point and press J The machine starts searching for available wireless routers SSID Settings Searching select Access Point Enter Manual ly NOTE If lt Cannot find the access point gt is displayed See When an Error Message Appears Select a wireless LAN router and press JA Select the router whose SSID matches the one that you have written down Select Access Point SSID Ol SSID 02 SSID 03 SSID 04 NOTE If your wireless router is not found Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network Installation Settings Problems 8 Enter the network key that you have written down 156 336 Enter the network key using the numeric keys select Apply and press R93 O Entering Text WEP m Key 5 26 Char WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK 8 64 Char Pj op Entry Mode aA Entry Mode aA 9 Select
268. se the toner cover and lower the operation panel NOTE If you cannot close the toner cover Make sure that the toner cartridge is inserted properly Forcing it closed may cause damage 255 336 0L40 07J When an Error Message Appears If you cannot connect network or the memory is full or you encounter operation problems a message appears on the display Find out more information about messages in the following list Toner cartridge is not installed correctly or there is possible trouble on the toner cartridge Reinstall the toner cartridge If this message does not disappear after reinstalling several times the toner cartridge might be possibly broken Contact the shop where you purchased the machine or the Canon Customer Care Center Q How to Replace Toner Cartridges You might not be using a Canon genuine cartridge We recommend Canon genuine toner cartridges as replacement toner cartridges Consumables When automatic setting with WPS was attempted a wireless router could not be detected within a specific period of time Connect again paying attention to the time limit Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode Q Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode An SSID or network key of a wireless router was entered manually but the entry was incorrect Check the SSID and network key and enter the correct ones again Q Checking the SSID and Network Key QSetting Up Connection by Specifying Det
269. ss OK f x a ES 100 m s Y 250 mm D Select the paper type and press JA n ux og T ir Plain L 60 90 g nr Recycled Color 47 336 LINKS Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot 48 336 OL40 017 Entering Quiet Mode The quiet mode function reduces the operation sound of the machine For example when using the machine at night press on the operation panel With only this operation you can easily minimize operation sound You can also specify a time for the machine to automatically enter quiet mode C Gara e oe cane PC7 Q NOTE When in quiet mode When the machine enters quiet mode lights up green When quiet mode is enabled The operation of functions becomes slower When the machine cannot enter quiet mode The machine is in Special Mode A particular paper size or paper type is specified Specifying a time for the machine to enter quiet mode Erit You can specify a time for the machine to enter or exit quiet mode automatically For example this is useful when wanting to reduce operation noise only for late night operation m Timer Settings p Quiet Mode Time p Specify each setting Apply b Quiet Mode Time lt Apply gt Start Time Off End Time v le lt Start Time Specify a time for entering quiet mode To set select lt On gt then specify the time Start Time Rx
270. ss LAN Settings and Information 1 Press W 2 Use A W to select Network Settings and press EJA If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press E93 Q Setting the System Manager PIN 3 Select Wireless LAN Settings and press JJ If the Enable the wireless LAN message is displayed select Yes and press n3 Read the message that is displayed and press J Select Wireless LAN Information and press EJA O U A Select the setting to view and press EJA Wireless LAN Info MAC Address wireless LAN Status Latest Error Inform Channel SSID Settings Secuirity Settings Power Save Mode BE Viewing WEP and WPA WPA2 PSK information Select Security Settings and press OK 2 Confirm and select the current security setting and press OK If the security settings are not configured None is displayed j Select the setting to view and press OK WEP WPA WPA2 PSK WEP Key 1 WPA WPA2 PSK WEP Key 2 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 4 Select WEP Key 802 11 Authenticati NOTE Wireless LAN Status and Latest Error Information can be viewed from g Press gt Network Information Wireless LAN Information and select the setting to view LINKS Connecting to a Wireless LAN Q Setting IPv4 Address Q Setting IPv6 Addresses oO 170 336 Configuring DNS 171 336 OL40 05H Configuring the Machine for P
271. stall Manual BERI Seres Manual 17 5 IH Uninstall begins a Wait a moment This process may take some time D click Exit 317 336 6 Click Back Exit Stas programa irem Lhe COU Click Ser Io fe nigri offe pagim you mani b siari d NSU Li reris sd ler Tha manata ireslallad by hi setup will ba eninstalled E tat 2 Cam MFILEP Wares SetupAssistani Readme T Cin ULP Wired Sep Assistant t a Bao which enaske you Ba confiees Whe accias pon are andasgwon kay reguined wien aen up acwireless LAH connection LS Start J v Canon Software Programs Manuals Setup lestallz the stardaed programe aed tha manuals Custom instalation natal the pega and manuals thet you select Start Software Programs Sane poqeeme eequred for confiqueng semings eic Manuals Dispis and imestalls 318 336 OL40 09Y Screen Layout of e Manual The e Manual is divided into different screens and the content of each screen varies Top Page Appears when e Manual is started 0999 Top Site Map Help Print DH Canon sss Manual ri inportant Safer Lister tens sy Basic Dperatncens Copying Going Green and Saving Money pm Lising the Wachina as a Printer iT Easy on the environment EF easy on your wallet I Using the Machine as SANET ph a mU There are lots of wes to cut back on paper boner power and expenses Aiciwsork
272. t Select the Type of Connection Surcme hoe of cone chon Detwe ien que eee and pou compuler ar I B d mm USE Connection i er oe nan aa 3 USB cable cone Ins Sears Io your computer E Cc 1 i a m Canned h Sedck le yaus imputa vig Poe nasa E m Fry mera irforrnaton pn Sow ta connaci Ins Sere uzir a eS LAH ralar i Canon s homme page In Server 2003 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 this screen is not displayed Proceed to the following procedure D Select the check box next to the application you want to install and click Install 14 47 Carsbom Installaticn Thi Sai Chi ppan shown Del ces will Da srisialie d Cici Qin ard ei ikna ia UC daparti ania scien Thra dak space required tor ME drivers may fer fom Ese space rumen riepiseed MF Dewars 3 Pergam reus Ser BTA el Socemeits ecafeine images and zandang asas By compestar Ze lil L MI Togl bar p Papam thal alise you f aasi Irpertimagas Staind it arcani lais an appliatien alach heat 25 B Emal mass ages rm henio hard disks eic T Toner che Hiit Pesqeam tal aleae you chenm E around amaning in cartedeas iram seus campuler i bia The status dispiared by this salsas may dier fmm the sius dispbrped on the rite Masty gps eld a es Pesgram Harl helps esu Ip manage scanmgd eocsmemts and phe Esupperiz zaarch fuschoss such az 550 ki keya sa anche and Ud searches 7 Mau id sc I These are the manuals tar tie Amite H au i
273. t OK lt Shortcut Key Settings gt OK Confirm Destination p OK Select shortcut key confirm Destination USB Connedted ce Color Scan Name of destination computer Shows the name of the computer registered as the save destination I Scan type Shows the type of scan that has been set Using the Scan gt PC Key 118 336 1 Place the document s Placing Documents 2 Press or for MF211 press E 223 To check the settings registered in the key see Checking the Registered Settings Scanning starts To cancel press p lt YeS gt p EA IMPORTANT You cannot scan while the MF Toolbox setup screen is displayed Close the screen aor ee before scanning SE a Scans oni mcr Select Spurce Pisten iac Peper See Lem m Ly Scan Meade rk Irege usi 350 z Cosplay the carne Die C Sars Gonna ings in Ele Fare Sean Save as pe Pop ot FOF Sang Seve came d mese io Pa eme v Baron Pictures bos Saubitoddes yah Caner haa i Lateral Appl c scien Dele iag and disp am appkcation ion hese bs regier 1 Spl EEan of ee Scanned age and E sf Seating Bmw den Cmm ELS 3 If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned place the next document on the platen glass and press Ej scan Next Press Start lt Finish Scanning gt lt Cance Confirm Destination Re
274. t displayed you can cancel printing in other ways Canceling Prints IMPORTANT Do not touch printed pages Do not touch newly printed sheets with your fingers or a cloth You may get your fingers or the cloth dirty and the toner may smear or come off the page NOTE When printing from the Windows Store app in Windows 8 8 1 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 Follow the procedure below Windows 8 Server 2012 Display the charms at the right of the screen and tap or click Devices the printer you are using Print When you print in this way you can only specify settings for some of the print functions Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 Display the charms at the right of the screen and tap or click Devices Print the printer you are using Print When you print in this way you can only specify settings for some of the print functions If the message The printer requires your attention Go to the desktop to take care of it is displayed go to the desktop and follow the instructions in the displayed dialog box This message appears when the machine is set to display the user name during printing and similar instances LINKS 2 Checking the Printing Status 71 336 OL40 03F Canceling Prints You can cancel printing from your computer or on the operation panel of the machine From a Computer Q From the Operation Panel You can cancel printing from the printer icon displayed on the system tray on the desktop
275. t Bonjour on Apple devices is enabled ll Checking Consumables on Macintosh You can display the screen for AirPrint on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view information about consumables such as paper and toner 97 336 Click System Preferences in the Dock on the desktop Print amp Scan Select your printer and click Options amp Supplies Click Show Printer Webpage K WN e Log on to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode To check the machine status or supplies you can also log on in End User Mode Tam PETI u t tux fifa ae E n a rmm ped Lori ly Ph Varie Gus Parcite aer rege Priel har thy eee TLS Salen ey Ury eel Cee cake Sere ee Famer tetaeroanian Paper Source Para La E Top Pare 18 fs Bord 28 b Bref LF Pasa 18 ip Paerd io Baath dc Proma Tery Lr Wi Trademarks Apple Bonjour iPad iPhone iPod touch Macintosh Mac OS and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc 98 336 OL40 048 Encrypting Communication of Print Data for Apple Devices with TLS Authorized users may incur unanticipated losses from attacks by malicious third parties such as sniffing spoofing and tampering of data as it flows over a network To protect your important and valuable information from these attacks you can use AirP
276. t each of them can be scanned as separate images Drag the cropping frame to specify the areas you want to scan You can specify up to ten areas Click Scan to scan the areas in the cropping frames as separate images Os Move the Image Drags the image to move the visible part of the image when a preview image is enlarged MC Zoom 135 336 Enlarges the entire preview image Left click the image to zoom in Right click the enlarged image to zoom out To enlarge a part of the image to check the details use Zoom amp Left Rotate i amp Right Rotate Rotates the preview image 90 degrees to the left or right Information Displays the current settings of the scanned image such as the color mode and size of the scan area tf Auto Crop Automatically sets the cropping frame that fits the scanned document Each time you click the icon the cropping frame is reduced s Clear Crop Frame Clears the selected cropping frame Select All Crops Selects all of the cropping frames on the image Zoom Enlarges the image in the cropping frame The smaller the cropping frame the larger the image is displayed You can check the details that are difficult to see with C M To return the image to its original size click this button again Specify the document input method document size color mode and other settings A Original Input Method Select Platen Glass Input Size
277. ta the software before connecting f tha Installing after from the Ganon abala BHi ara CO tha machina and a compter via a cabla istal the software before connecting the B H CQ search with these conditions Enter keyword s here Enter one or more keywords and click to display search results in a results list You can enter a phrase to find pages that contain all of the words in the phrase To find an exact phrase enclose it in double quotation marks I Search options Click to specify search conditions such as the scope of the search and case sensitivity Search scope selector You can use this to select the individual chapters to search This allows you to search more efficiently when you can predict the chapters containing the topic that you are looking for M Search options selector Select the check box to make your search case sensitive Search with these conditions and M specify the conditions After setting them press this to perform the search and display the results in the Result list o Result list This displays pages that contain the specified keywords From the results locate the page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page If the results cannot be displayed on one page click mn or a page number to display the results on the corresponding page Site Map This page displays the titles of all topics in the Installation Guide
278. talling the scanner driver Select the check box to scan documents via WSD When not using WSD scanning clear the check box Use Computer Scanning Select the check box to use WSD scanning by operating the machine with the operation panel This check box can only be selected when the Use WSD Scanning check box is selected To perform scanning press E COPY SCAN and specify a WSD connected computer as a scan destination Scanning from the Machine Use Multicast Discovery Select the check box to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages If the check box is cleared the machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast discovery messages are flowing on the network 3 Click OK 174 336 D Restart the machine Turn OFF the machine wait for at least 10 seconds and turn it back ON NOTE Using the operation panel LPD RAW and WSD settings can also be accessed from Menu screen OG LPD Print Settings 2 RAW Print Settings WSD Settings Setting up WSD network devices on Windows Vista 7 8 8 1 The WSD printer and scanner can be added from the printer folder Open the printer folder Displaying the Printer Folder click Add a device or Add a printer and follow the on screen instructions For more information about how to install MF Drivers for the WSD network printer see MF Driver Installation Guide LINKS Q Configuring Printer Ports 175 336 OL40 05K Configuring Printer Ports Printi
279. tc may vary this amount is not harmful Ozone etc may be more noticeable during extended use or long production runs especially in poorly ventilated rooms It is recommended that the room where the machine operates be appropriately ventilated to maintain a comfortable working environment Also avoid locations where people would be exposed to emissions from the machine Do not install in a location where condensation occurs Water droplets condensation may form inside the machine when the room where the machine is installed is heated rapidly and when the machine is moved from a cool or dry location to a hot or humid location Using the machine under these conditions may result in paper jams poor print quality or damage to the machine Let the machine adjust to the ambient temperature and humidity for at least 2 hours before use When using wireless LAN MF212w Set the machine at a distance of 50 m or less from the wireless LAN router Do not set machine in a location where any object blocks communication The signal may be degraded when passing through walls or floors Keep the machine as far as possible from digital cordless phones microwave ovens or other equipment that emit radio waves In altitudes of 3 000 m or above sea level Machines with a hard disk may not operate properly when used at high altitudes of about 3 000 meters above sea level or higher 8 336 OL40 002 Power Supply This machine is compatible
280. tem is not displayed when OCR is selected for the type of scan Configuring Storing Settings Specify settings for the scanned data such as the file name file format PDF JPEG etc and save destination EBH Ma fraps ho ihe selected Folder ns and opera De maga by padie appicaon ecran Deirg 9 Jue Paper ie Lair Scan blade Tale xy uat 30 45 D rzsiag the cones Dres e V gem Scared brace Fr Sarva ar ppa fares brannej rugs ix zd ja Idem Anger aior Drag acl drop aei ape eo icon hee Fn roger br 1Ipaefinaisce of the Sane rege and Epi Gatlings Bmw File Name Enter the name for the scanned data file NOTE If a file with the same name already exists in the save destination a unique sequential four digit number for example 0001 is 128 336 appended to the new file name Save as Type Select the file format BMP JPEG Exif TIFF PDF PDF Single Page PDF Multiple Pages PDF Add Page NOTE The scanned document is converted into a bitmap image The scanned document is converted into a JPEG Exif image This setting is available when Grayscale Color or Color Magazine is selected for Scan Mode Configuring Scan Settings The scanned document is converted into a TIFF image A PDF file is created If you scan a multi page document these pages are merged into one PDF file A one page PDF file is created for each
281. ter Color Scan B amp W Scan Custom 1 Custom 2 You can register frequently used settings in advance Configuring Scan Settings in MF Toolbox You can also specify an application as a forwarding destination When you scan by using the operation panel the settings registered here are applied Scanning from the Machine Scanning Using the Scan gt PC Key NOTE To switch a scanner 121 336 If two or more machines are installed and you want to switch to another machine click Settings and select the machine Configuring Settings for MF Toolbox and the Scanner f n L 1 f cA P P Bia Lipa T Lumian 2 Scan 22 as 5 2 Eases be scenes ihe seleciedfokder gt Se eee Se a Domma Ton imo Select Space Paper 5 ne B can biri Wege Dusty E Deploy the Eas ares Dao ne Baron Scanned rasga irs pe aee Soran Save ac Type Por Seve cmd mage bo a uem 3 Pme I Saree Dire ims babigda yah Careri Dis M iremis rag andi dop ae spleen icon hae Eo rescuer Piisi of fe Scanned ape nd Ep Satingal Beet dme D Click Start Scanning starts a To cancel click Cancel ii When scanning several documents K If the screen shown below is displayed you can continue scanning documents When you can only scan one page at a time such as when the JPEG format is specified this screen is not displayed Earning Of page 1 a aed T it n edv pigi plica ha cria c ac
282. ter a mode for copying the front and back sides of a driver s license or other ID card onto the same side of a page at actual size G Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page F3 Display Displays the operation and status screens for copying and other functions as well as the status of the machine and error information Also view the screen when specifying the settings of the machine 3 Reset key Press to cancel the settings and restore the previously specified settings Aq key When specifying settings press to return to the previous screen When entering text press to move the cursor to the left Press to decrease a setting value such as density for scanning copying etc ELA key When specifying settings press to select the item above the currently selected item When changing setting values press to increase a value BIb 1 key When specifying settings press to proceed to the next screen When entering text press to move the cursor to the right Press to increase a setting value such as density for scanning copying etc BI Wd key When specifying settings press to select the item below the currently selected item When changing setting values press to decrease a value P Clear key Press to delete the entered numbers and text M Back key Press to return to the previous screen If you press this key when specifying settings for example the settings are not applied and the disp
283. ter a number of up to seven digits for the System Manager PIN System Manager Name Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the name of an Administrator Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the name and the installation location to identify the machine Device Name Location 244 336 E System Management Settings p Device Information Settings Select Device Name or Location Enter Device Name or Location Entering Text Apply feral Entry Mode aA Security Settings 1 Enable or disable settings for IP address or MAC address packet filtering IPv4 Address Filter EJ Enable or disable settings for filtering packets received from devices with specified IPv4 addresses Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules Offt On 53 System Management Settings p Security Settings IPv4 Address Filter etal Inbound Filter p Select Off or On E IPv6 Address Filter Ea Enable or disable settings for filtering packets received from devices with specified IPv6 addresses Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules Offt On E System Management Settings p Security Settings IPv6 Address Filter BST Inbound Filter p Select Off or On p e E MAC Address Filter Enable or disable settings for filtering packets received from devices with specified MAC addresses Specifying MAC Addr
284. tering the Brightness or Color Setting To register only the brightness contrast histogram tone curve or threshold setting follow the procedure below 1 Place the document s and click Preview 143 336 2 Adjust the brightness or color Adjusting Brightness and Color Select settings to register as necessary 3 Select Add Delete in the drop down list sau FOL R n The Add Delete Tone Curve Settings or Add Delete Threshold Settings screen is displayed 4 Enter a name into Setting Name and click Add Save Enter a name for the settings to register Use a name that is easy to find in the drop down list Tone Cures 5 sang List NOTE Calling the registered setting Display a preview image and select the registered setting in the drop down list LINKS Q Configuring Scan Settings in Simple Mode Q Scanning Using MF Toolbox Q Scanning Using an Application 144 336 OL40 050 Network RziPpi The machine has been designed for flexibility of use across a variety of environments and it includes advanced technologies in addition to basic network features Do not worry if you are not a network expert because the machine has also been designed for convenience and ease of use Relax and proceed with the network setup one step at a time E Connecting to a Computer Viewing the Machine s Network Settings Connecting to a
285. termark Name drop down list Select a watermark from the menu 5 Edit Watermark Displays the screen to create or edit watermarks Add Click to create a new watermark Up to 50 watermarks can be registered Name Enter the created watermark name Attributes Alignment Print Style Click each tab to specify the text color or print position of the watermark For more information click Help on the printer driver screen LINKS 83 336 Q Printing a Document Q Printing Borders Q Printing Dates and Page Numbers 84 336 OL40 041 Selecting Document Type You can specify the document type to ensure optimal image quality There are different settings for photo documents documents that have charts or graphs and documents that have design drawings with fine lines Tha mode im Lad wher prinio docomasnig in quac A Objective Select an option that suits the document type or purpose of printing For example select General for general use or select Photos when you want to print photo images in optimal print quality General A versatile option that is suitable when printing most documents Publications Suitable when printing documents that have a mix of photo images charts and graphs Graphics Suitable when printing documents that have charts or graphs Photos Suitable when printing photo images Designs CAD Suitable when printing design d
286. tes the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page You can check what page is currently displayed F3 Refresh Icon Refreshes the currently displayed page F3 Top Icon Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down Settings Registration Page B Copy Fatiga n Fe whs tard LTE Pis cl Ie ad Ib cel LTE Pes cpe Ie iia ace 3 To Portal Returns to Portal Page main page F Menu Click an item the content is displayed in the right page OQ Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI F Breadcrumb Trail Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page You can check what page is currently displayed F3 Top Icon Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down F3 Edit Allows you to register or change machine settings QSetting Up Menu Options from Remote UI NOTE System Management Settings amp You can only set System Management Settings when you have logged on in System Manager Mode amp When you have logged on in End User Mode only System Management will be displayed 213 336 OL40 06U Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status Checking Current Status of Print Documents Q Checking Error Information Checking Consumables Q Checking Maximum Print Speed Q Checking System Manager Information Checking Print Total Counter NOTE The document file name displays only
287. th the Machine WPS Push Button Mode Select to automatically configure a wireless connection by using the button on a WPS wireless router Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode WPS PIN Code Mode Select to configure a wireless connection by entering a PIN code for a WPS wireless router Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode SSID Settings Select to configure a wireless connection by specifying information including an SSID or a network key by inputting manually from the operation panel Select Access Point Wireless LAN routers that can access the machine are automatically located so you can select from the list You must manually enter a network key such as a WEP key or a PSK Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router Enter Manually Select to configure a wireless connection by manually entering an SSID By using this method you can specify authentication and 220 336 encryption settings in detail OQ Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings Security Settings None WEP Open Systemt Select WEP Key 1 2 3 4 Edit WEP Key Shared Key Select WEP Key 1 2 3 4 Edit WEP Key WPA WPA2 PSK Auto t AES CCMP Power Save Mode E4 Select whether or not the machine enters Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless router Offt On Network Settings Wireless LAN Settings Read the displayed message feral Power Save Mode s E Select Off or O
288. the Operation Panel 2 Press 3 3 Use A W to select Network Settings and press RJA If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press E93 QSetting the System Manager PIN 4 Select Wireless LAN Settings and press JJ If the Enable the wireless LAN message is displayed select Yes and press R3 D Read the message that is displayed and press J 6 Select lt WPS PIN Code Mode and press Ef WPS PIN Code Mode SSID Settings Power Save Mode y Select Yes and press JJ A PIN code is generated Do you want to Searching connect using new Enter the access point settings PIN code Cm PIN Code 12345678 Cancel Press Stop From a Computer 8 Register the generated PIN code to the wireless router Register the PIN code on the setup screen displayed in step 1 The PIN code must be registered within 10 minutes after pressing OK in step 7 NOTE If an error message is displayed during setup Press fs and return to step 6 S From the Operation Panel 154 336 a Check that the Wi Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel The Wi Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected When the setup is completed the screen below is displayed and approximately 2 seconds later the Wi Fi indicator lights up Connected Signal strength When more than one wireless router is available for connection
289. the machine connects to the device with the strongest signal Signal strength is measured using RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication NOTE Reducing power consumption You can set the machine to enter Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless router Power Save Mode If the IP address of the machine has changed In a DHCP environment the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically If this happens the connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet LINKS Connecting to a Wireless LAN 155 336 OL40 057 Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router You can search the wireless routers or access points available for connection and select one from the display of the machine For the network key enter a WEP key or TKIP Before selecting a wireless router check and write down the required setup information including the SSID and network key Checking the SSID and Network Key NOTE Security settings If the wireless connection is set up by selecting a wireless router the WEP authentication method is set to lt Open System gt or the WPA WPA2 encryption method is set to Auto AES CCMP or TKIP If you want to select Shared Key for WEP authentication or lt AES CCMP gt for WPA WPA2 encryption you need to set up the connection using the manual entry method Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings 1 Press j 2 U
290. the use conditions and environment of the machine 3 The value indicates the mass of the main unit including toner cartridges 302 336 OL40 09A Wireless LAN Specifications Standard IEEE 802 11g IEEE 802 11b IEEE 802 11n PUTS EU 2 412 to 2 472 MHz Range IEEE 802 11g 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54 Mbps Data IEEE 802 11b Transmission 1 2 5 5 11 Mbps Rate IEEE 802 11n SGI Invalidated 20 MHz 6 5 13 19 5 26 39 52 58 5 65 Mbps SGI Validated 20 MHz 7 2 14 4 21 7 28 9 43 3 57 8 72 2 Mbps Communication Infrastructure Mode Mode Security WEP 64 128 bit WPA PSK TKIP AES WPA2 PSK AES 802 1x LEAP EAP FAST PEAP EAP TLS EAP TTLS Connection WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup Manual setu Method ee up E 303 336 OL40 09C Document Type ll Supported Document Types Plain paper Heavy paper Photograph Small documents for example index cards Special types of paper for Type example tracing paper transparencies etc Booklet Up to 24 mm thickness Size Up to 216 x 297 mm W x L Weight Up to 2 kg Paper 1 sheet Capacity 304 336 OL40 09E Scan Area The shaded areas in the table below indicate the scan area of the document Make sure that text and images in your documents fit within the shaded area The scan area varies depending on the function used and where documents are placed Copy NOTE The scan area for copying may differ from the printable area Printable Area Scan 305 336
291. thod 8 On the Document Name list select the combined document print job you want to print and click H Printing starts For instructions on how to cancel printing see Canceling Prints LINKS Q Printing a Document 89 336 OL40 044 Configuring Print Settings to Your Needs You can register combinations of settings as profiles to suit your different printing objectives Also you can register the settings that you frequently use as the default settings Once the default settings are registered they are displayed automatically in the printer driver screen and you can skip the operations to specify them and proceed to printing immediately Set TOP SECRET as a watermark and register it in profiles You can then select this watermark from profiles whenever you need it Registering Combinations of When print highly Frequently Used Print Settings confidential documents include a TOP SECRET pu watermark Set 2 on 1 as a default setting in the printer driver From the next print job every To save printing costs printout page will show 2 pages from the document 2 Changing Default Settings always print 2 document pages on printout page 90 336 OL40 045 Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print Settings Specifying combinations of settings such as landscape orientation on A4 size paper in save toner mode every time you print is time consuming If you register your freq
292. ting a host name with an IP address without using DNS Select the check box to enable mDNS Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4 Select the check box to use the same mDNS name as in IPv4 To set a different name clear the check box and enter the mDNS name in the mDNS Name text box j Click OK SM beep EDS re siet ie hired p 4 e Mie dai am Pein Tedi Hal Torewrtes Hm the ra cong Eemcke UL rey riot be abie tobe asinioisind nier chc iCal Ez apply e IF Fania merat etn pad Farid ruins te i E Pul Samia m n m _ dmm Weegee er mu soii Sgen hinracgenremt zx ue s B birkak netting Liik List tours Mary aor iiair Local kireamh Od Dd a ID DA E cdd NOTE Using the operation panel DNS settings can also be accessed from Menu screen IPv4 Settings 2IPv6 Settings 189 336 LINKS QSetting IPv4 Address Q Setting IPv6 Addresses Q Viewing Network Settings 190 336 0LA40 05Y Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a network by using Management Information Base MIB The machine supports SNMPv1 You can check the status of the machine from a computer when you print documents or use the Remote UI NOTE The machine does not support the trap notification feature of SNMP amp To change the port number of SNMP see Changing Port Numbers MF212w SNMP
293. ting a key pair Select the key length from the drop down list The larger the number for the key length the slower the communication However the security is tighter NOTE 512 bit cannot be selected for the key length if SHA384 or SHA512 is selected for Signature Algorithm Certificate Signing Request CSR Settings Click s Key Click NOTE Country Region Click the Select Country Region radio button and select the country region from the drop down list You can also click the Enter Internet Country Code radio button and enter a country code such as US for the United States State City Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary Organization Organization Unit Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary Common Name Enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certificate as necessary Common Name is often abbreviated as CN OK and Certificate Signing Request CSR may take approximately 10 to 15 minutes to generate Store in File ub dmm ee unl ap Tn p ner an ae Murar EI I ve acu ere a Romy mud Cerio Partien Darm gw Corp s Geman Ko amd Ortik Segeing Regunet LR larg aed Cerio Goring Aet Coe Caria Woy andi Certificate Zisning Faquagt CP Cata is Ragai Oriko j If a confirmation window appears click Save to save the file 106 336 a Click Register Certificate
294. tings E43 Enable or disable SNMPvi When enabling SNMPv1 specify a community name and access privileges to Management Information Base MIB objects Off Ont Community Name 1 Settings Off Ont Community Name 2 Settings Offt On Dedicated Community Settings Off Ont lt Network Settings gt lt SNMP Settings gt gt SNMPv1 Settings SNMPv1 Settings Select Off or On p Specify settings if On is selected p e E 224 336 Acquire Printer Management Information from Host ta Enable or disable the monitoring of printer management information from a networked computer running SNMP compatible software Offt On 53 Network Settings gt SNMP Settings p Acquire Printer Management Information from Host p Select Off or On p 63 Enable or disable the dedicated port The dedicated port is used when printing or scanning uses MF Toolbox and when browsing or specifying the machine settings over the network Off Ont m 53 Network Settings Dedicated Port Settings Select Off or On bh EJ Specify a wait time for connecting to a network Select the setting depending on the network environment Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network Ot to 300 sec Select the communication mode of Ethernet half duplex full duplex and the Ethernet type 10BASE T 100BASE TX You can also view the MAC address of the machine
295. tings can be specified by using a Web browser on a computer To use the Remote UI the machine must be connected to a computer over the network If you do not need to use the Remote UI you might want to disable the Remote UI to reduce the risk of having your machine controlled remotely over the network by malicious third parties 1 Press jj 2 Use A W to select System Management Settings and press n3 a If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press n3 Q Setting the System Manager PIN 3 Select Remote UI Settings Use Remote UI 4 Select lt Off gt and press 3 Use Remote UI On 2 Off Disables the Remote UI 5 On Enables the Remote UI LINKS QUsing Remote UI MF212w Disabling HTTP Communication 208 336 OL40 06L Using a Web browser to operate the machine remotely you can check the documents waiting to be printed or the status of the machine You can also make some settings such as security You can do this without leaving your desk making system management easier Functions of the Remote UI Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status QSetting Up Menu Options from Remote UI Basics of the Remote UI Q Starting Remote UI Remote UI Screens System Requirements The following environment is required to use the Remote UI In addition set the Web browser to enable Cookies Windows Windows XP Vista
296. to 16 on 1 For example to print 16 pages onto a single sheet select 16 on 1 ET NOTE For options such as Poster 2 x 2 see Printing Posters Printing may not be performed properly if you combine this setting with an application setting for collating printouts M Page Order Select a page distribution layout For example if you select Across from Left the first page is printed on the top left and then the rest of the pages are arranged rightward LINKS Printing a Document 79 336 OL40 03U Printing Posters You can print one page of a document onto multiple pages For example if you make a one page A4 size document nine times larger you will have a poster 3x3 A4 size sheets large after you print the document and paste it together There are four size settings Poster 1 x 2 Poster 2 x 2 Poster 3 x 3 and Poster 4 x 4 Select the Print Border check box to add borders on your printouts The borders are helpful if you want to paste the printouts together or cut off the margins LINKS Printing a Document Q Enlarging or Reducing 80 336 OL40 03X Printing Borders You can add borders such as broken lines or double lines in the margins of printouts 7 ry Page Setup tab Click Page Options Select the border type in Edging OK OK Co c we Edging
297. to help you identify this machine when operating your Apple device This information is useful if you have more than one AirPrint printer AirPrint Speed Image Quality Priority Select Speed Priority or Image Quality Priority as the quality mode for printing with AirPrint This function is only enabled when printing a PDF NOTE If you change Printer Name If the set Printer Name is changed you may become unable to print from a Macintosh you were using This occurs because mDNS Name Configuring DNS for IPv4 is also changed In this case add this machine to the Macintosh again Printer name and location Printer Name and Location are reflected in the following settings respectively Printer Name can also be set in mDNS Name IPv4 Settings Location can also be set in Location Device Information Settings You cannot print using AirPrint Make sure that the machine is turned ON If the machine is turned ON restart the machine and see if the problem is solved Make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and the machine has enough toner Loading Paper Replacing Toner Cartridges Make sure that no error message is displayed in the machine s display Make sure that Apple devices iPad iPhone iPod touch Macintosh and the machine are connected to the same LAN If the machine is turned ON it may take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication Make sure tha
298. to specify the date and time or switch between lt AM gt lt PM gt 8 amp 4 Current Time Set A H11 2014 12 56 PM 0 00 12 59 E Timer Settings p Date Time Settings Current Date Time Settings p Set the date and time NOTE The current date and time cannot be changed for 1 hour after daylight saving time is in effect Daylight Saving Time Settings 1 x Enable or disable daylight saving time If daylight saving time is enabled specify the dates from which and to which daylight saving time is in effect Off Ont Start Month Week Day End Month Week Day 53 Timer Settings Date Time Settings Daylight Saving Time Settings Select a starting month and day Apply Select an ending month and day Apply b F Auto Sleep Time 232 336 If the machine has not been operated or has had no data to process for a specified period of time the machine enters sleep mode to save energy consumption Auto Sleep Specify the period of time after which auto sleep is performed Auto Sleep is not performed when the setting menu is displayed We recommend using the factory default settings to save the most power Entering Sleep Mode 5t to 30 min If a key is not pressed for a specified period of time the screen and the settings are initialized to display the default screen Auto Reset Specify the interval at which the Auto Reset
299. tware Programs Manuals Setup Easy Installation lnsgialls the siariad programs aed ihe manuals Custom Installation natal the programas and manuals that you aslect Start Software Prograrns Giana pogeamk gued for coshqueng sete ele Ispis and rials manuals NOTE If the above screen is not displayed Displaying the Software Programs Manuals Setup Screen 3 Click Start for Canon MF LBP Wireless Setup Assistant Start Software Programs Bare programa tomta CODVO Click Ste e regi of tes progr am you ant do start Manual Linireialiar 5 The manua installed by tnis setup wii De uniri stallad digi Conon MEILBP Wireless Setup Assistant Resi Ganon IFA BP Firmina Sabup cael Es a Dci whch abs pou bn confinm ine acoess poini ere T ursi nebat kay equina whan sting up a ined LAM canmacion 1 Sari J 161 336 4 Read the License Agreement and click Yes to agree READ CAREFULLY AHD UNDERSTAND ALL OF THE RIGHTS AHD RES TEICTIDHS DESCRIEED m THES AGPE DHT I FOPE ms TALLINE THE SOT Ir CGE THE IRI TT OR IND CATING TOUR AHDE 24 STATED BELO OF INSTALLS THE SOFTWARE 110 THE SOFTWARE NO RADE BECAUSE THE FRIMDED TU YOAT ND I you accuel ha agnam click az E vou chick Fin the ircilaliahon cd ha satra al ba coco Cx e D Check the information displayed for the wireless router Write down the necessary information If you do not know what infor
300. twork Gannedion Genie Esa dence da pour campulie vii the rabevoik i Fer mara informatios on how d Derren cl Ea device uzim 3 wireless LAN radar to Canons home page Wired Wireless LAN Connection Select Network Connection and click Next Select the Type of Connection Heihi hoe or coniaeckn bata Te deere 3nd you cormpuleii Lisa 3 USE cabis Ja connect the device I pour commuter Nag um re B USE Connecien H m onm 3 Ge j li ag Connie the Service la pour computer via the network For mera intonation pn ow b connect tna Arica using a wirgiezs LAH ralar t Canon s home page In Server 2003 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 this screen is not displayed Proceed to the following procedure D Click Install Easy Installation The debawing pragesm well b niad Clice pns and men fedcow the instructions dis pared oe mie bien ao HF Dover N Picorams required or pear Sacumenis scanniaq images and aing ases as COLA 298 WB MF Touba Pr gesm mal allows vig fa sai mpor images scanned with 3 scanner ine an applicsbos aac necs do e mail z wB messages Gave Tram isnan disk eir E Taner labes Readme jig Pragan that allows yra io check Hir amount remaining is cartridges from pour campuiar Pent The status dispixsed tu thls pafwa rar dear trom fe ebrius die played c fie geria hy Heuss Theb ng ve ira rci E ka Hee Service IT yon inl D icai d ah pout ea ipu vara cies p Lg Ia
301. uals Setup lngialls the siariad programs aed ihe manuals Custom instalation haak the proram and manuals that you select Bitar Software Programs Bans paogdamk gued for confiqueng ssmngs elc Manuals j Dispirys and mialy manuals 3 Select USB Connection and click Next Select the Type of Connection Salect the tpe afconnecion between Ee dede and your Computer F LE ig yv g UE Connection i nE Lise a USE cable ip canned the device to your computer Farat infermation an howto cannad fe dika using a wireless LAM refarte Camins ama pagi 2 Ut om TERN NOTE Select USB Connection even if connected using a network 4 Clear all the check boxes except for Manuals and click Install Custom Installation The G6 Chet proram shian Bel ow will Be installed Click neta ard hen hie ihe instructi one apered on the ecran z Wm j Programa requiradtor printing decumas acenning imagas and sanding axes Dy compulzr Jii ME MF Tpalspx Program Fori allows pau In easly import images scanned wih 3 sanre iin an application sisch them tn IVE e mail meeseges save ther th hard disks etr Toner Sistus Rasime Program Feri alkaws pou Ep check ing anauri ra reed dey in caririd gas inan your conmpuler i WB Jn zii ai PTO mi Tus SENS ITI TT Oe LS DESERUNT OU Oe OPAC rt Frain Pagi anager qE Program tor beris you da manage scanned darurmenis and phones E suppnris sea
302. uch as scope of search and fuzzy match conditions To display the conditions click this button when it is gray To close the display click the button when it is orange M Search scope selector Specifies the search scope You can efficiently search for topics by narrowing the search scope The search scope selector is especially useful when you can predict the general location of the topic that you are looking for M Search options selector Select the check box to make your search case sensitive Search with these conditions Click to display the search results with the conditions specified with and M M Search result dialog box Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specified keywords From the results locate the page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page If the results cannot be displayed on one page click B J or a page number to display the results on the corresponding page Site Map Displays the table of contents for the e Manual Tee Site Map Help Print By Canon FFP iP Y Nexl b Basic Operations Parts and Their Functions Froni Side Bark Side Interior Manual Feed Slot Paper Craver DOparatian Pansi Desplay Using the Operation Panel Entering Text Placing Documents Loading Paper Loading Paper in the Paper Draver Chapter icons Click to jump to the topic of the selected chapter 322 336 5 Title Topic Displays titles and topics Cli
303. uently used combinations of print settings as profiles you can specify print settings simply by selecting one of the profiles from the list This section explains how to register profiles and how to print using profiles Q Registering a Profile Selecting a Profile 1 Change the settings that you want to register as a profile and click Add Make print settings as required on the Basic Settings Page Setup Finishing and Quality tabs Various Print Settings 2 Enter a profile name in Name select an icon and then click OK As necessary enter comments about the profile in Comment Click View Settings to see the settings that will be registered NOTE Editing a profile By clicking Edit on the right side of Profile on the screen shown in step 1 you can change the name icon or comment of the profiles you have previously registered However you cannot edit the pre registered profiles Simply select the profile that suits your objective and click OK 91 336 J mea NOTE Changing the settings of the currently selected profile You can change the settings of the currently selected profile In addition the changed settings can be registered as another profile LINKS Q Printing a Document Q Changing Default Settings 92 336 OL40 046 Changing Default Settings The default settings are the settings that are
304. ush button mode and PIN code mode Mm Push Button Mode Find the WPS mark shown below on the package of your wireless router Also make sure that there is a WPS button on your networking device Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode B PIN Code Mode Some WPS routers do not support the push button mode If WPS PIN code mode is mentioned on the package or in the instruction manuals of your networking device set up the connection by entering the PIN code Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode 150 336 NOTE If the wireless router is set to use WEP authentication you may not be able to set up connection using WPS Manually Setting Up Connection When manually setting up a wireless connection you can either select a wireless router or manually enter the required information Regardless of the method make sure that you have the required setup information including the SSID and network key G Checking the SSID and Network Key ll Selecting a Wireless Router Select this setup option if you need to manually set up the connection but want to complete the setup as easily as possible Q Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router llManually Entering the Setup Information If you want to specify security settings in detail such as authentication and encryption settings manually enter the SSID and network key to set up the connection Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings LINKS Conn
305. ust be selected to configure the settings OQ Setting IPv6 Addresses Prey OFS Serve ndo Snr DAC CITAS HDI ODE EXC DIOC DOM arirala SAP frin Diii foods ere there 080 code err Pee hans as Pus Cep Lea mar a I DNS Settings Primary DNS Server Address Enter the IP address of a DNS server Addresses that start with ff or multicast address cannot be entered Secondary DNS Server Address Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server if any Addresses that start with ff or multicast address cannot be entered Use Same Host Name Domain Name as IPv4 Select the check box to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4 Host Name Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS server Domain Name Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to such as example com DNS Dynamic Update Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine s IP address is changed To specify the type s of addresses you want to register to the DNS server select the check box for Register Manual Address Register Stateful Address or Register Stateless Address To specify the interval between updates enter the time in hours in the DNS Dynamic Update Interval text box mDNS Settings Use mDNS Adopted by Bonjour mDNS multicast DNS is a protocol for associa
306. ustom Ratio gt Use A W or the numeric keys to enter the copy ratio and press R3 You can set any copy ratio from 25 to 400 in 1 increments Custom Ratio ah D ww 25 400 I Preset copy ratio Select a copy ratio LINKS Basic Copy Operations 59 336 OL40 01H Selecting Document Type You can select the optical image quality for the copy depending on the document type such as text only documents documents with charts and graphs or magazine photos Text Photo High Spe Tet Poto 9 Photo 6 lt Text gt Suitable when copying documents that only contain text M Text Photo High Speed Suitable when copying documents that contain both text and photos Priority is given to speed over image quality A lt Text Photo gt Suitable when copying documents that contain both text and photos M Photo Suitable when copying documents that contain printed photos such as magazines or pamphlets NOTE If lt Text Photo High Speed gt lt Text Photo gt or lt Photo gt is selected and lt Density gt is set to lt Auto Density gt it changes to lt Manual Density gt LINKS Basic Copy Operations 60 336 0L40 01J Adjusting Density fai You can adjust the density of the copy if the text or images in a document are too light or dark You can also automatically set an optimal density for a document 5 i Pts m INE COPY SCAN
307. vailable for the MF212w Set whether printing goes ahead if a paper size other than the size loaded in the paper source is selected You can also set the machine not to go ahead with printing and instead display an alert message When an Error Message Appears Force Output Display Errort 53 Printer Settings Action When Paper Size Mismatch Select Force Output or Display Error p Nardi Select the image processing when printing from a mobile device with AirPrint Mopria TM etc Select Gradation for photos and illustrations and Error Diffusion for mostly text documents for more attractive printouts Gradation t Error Diffusion Printer Settings p Mobile Print Halftones Select Gradation or Error Diffusion ts Bg Select whether to give priority to print speed or to print quality when using AirPrint 237 336 Speed Priority Image Quality Priorityt Printer Settings fa AirPrint Speed Image Quality Priority Select Speed Priority or Image Quality Priority sr 5 238 336 OL40 079 Adjustment Maintenance All the settings about adjustment and maintenance are listed with short descriptions Default settings are marked with a dagger copy Settings Scan Settings Printer Settings Adjustment Maintenan Q Toner Save Q Special Processing Q Clean Fixing Assembly Select whether to reduce to
308. varies depending on the application IMPORTANT The application must be compatible with TWAIN or WIA For more information see the instruction manual for your application TWAIN is a standard for connecting image input devices such as scanners with computers WIA is a function that is an integrated standard in Windows 1 Place the document s Placing Documents E IMPORTANT The second or subsequent documents may not be scanned or an error message may be displayed depending on the application In such a case place and scan one document at a time 2 From the application select the start scan command The procedure for selecting the start scan command varies depending on the application For more information see the instruction manual for your application 3 Select the scanner driver for the machine Select ScanGear MF or WIA If you select ScanGear MF you can configure advanced scan settings 4 Configure the scan settings as necessary For more information about ScanGear MF scan settings see Configuring Scan Settings in Simple Mode or Configuring Scan Settings in Advanced Mode 5 Click Scan a Scanning starts When scanning is complete the scanned image is forwarded to an application LINKS 2 Configuring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF 131 336 0L40 04W Configuring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF ScanGear MF is a scanner driver included with the machine You can use ScanGear MF as f
309. with voltages of 220 to 240 V and electrical frequency of 50 60 Hz IMPORTANT When connecting power Do not connect the machine to an uninterruptible power source If plugging this machine into an AC power outlet with multiple sockets do not use the remaining sockets to connect other devices Do not connect the power cord into the auxiliary outlet on a computer Other precautions Electrical noise may cause this machine to malfunction or lose data 9 336 0L40 003 A N WARNING Immediately unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and contact an authorized Canon dealer if the machine makes an unusual noise emits an unusual smell or emits smoke or excessive heat Continued use may result in a fire or electrical shock Do not disassemble or modify this machine There are high voltage and high temperature components inside the machine which may result in a fire or electrical shock Place the machine where children will not come in contact with the power cord and other cables or internal and electrical parts Failure to do so may result in unexpected accidents Do not use flammable sprays near this machine If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside this machine it may result in a fire or electrical shock When moving this machine be sure to turn OFF the power of this machine and your computer and then unplug the power plug and interface cables Failure to do so may damage th
310. without notice Dispose of the removed sealing tape according to local regulations When disposing of a used toner cartridge Place the toner container into its protective bag to prevent the toner from scattering and then dispose of the toner cartridge according to local regulations 14 336 OL40 006 Basic Operations This chapter describes basic operations such as how to use the operation panel or how to load the paper and documents that are frequently performed to use the functions of the machine B Parts and Their Functions This section describes the exterior and interior parts of the machine and their functions as well as how to use the keys on the operation panel and how to view the display Parts and Their Functions W Using the Operation Panel This section describes how to toggle the display and select items Using the Operation Panel llPlacing Documents This section describes how to place documents on the platen glass Placing Documents E Loading Paper This section describes how to load the paper into the paper drawer and manual feed slot Loading Paper ll Entering Quiet Mode This section describes how to place the machine in quiet mode to reduce operation sound Entering Quiet Mode ll Entering Sleep Mode 15 336 This section describes how to set the sleep mode Entering Sleep Mode ll Setting Auto Shutdown Time This section describes how to enable the Auto Shutdown Ti
311. y destination gt pane Buttons and other text interfaces displayed on the computer display Preferences Computer Screens Used in This Manual Unless otherwise noted displays used in the e Manual are those for the MF212w Depending on the operating system you are using the appearance of the displays used in this manual may slightly differ from the actual displays Also the appearance of drivers and software may differ depending on their version Illustrations Used in This Manual Unless otherwise noted illustrations used in the e Manual are those for the MF212w When differences are significant multiple illustrations are used with the model names such as MFXXXX MFXXXX 324 336 OL40 0A1 Others This section describes basic Windows operations and includes disclaimers copyright information and other information 325 336 OL40 0A2 Basic Windows Operations E Displaying Computer or My Computer Windows XP Professional Server 2003 Server 2003 R2 Start select My Computer Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Start select Computer Windows 8 Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen select File Explorer Computer Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 Right click Start select File Explorer Computer E Displaying the Printer Folder Windows XP Professional Server 2003 Server 2003 R2 Start select Printers and Faxes Windows XP Home Edition
312. ys Press to enter numbers and text Entering Text A Stop key Press to cancel copying scanning and other operations I8 Energy Saver key Press to put the machine into sleep mode The key lights up green when the machine is in sleep mode Press the key again to exit sleep mode Q Entering Sleep Mode M Scan gt PC1 Scan gt PC2 keys Press to send the scanned documents to the registered computer for each key Scanning Using the Scan gt PC Key M Quiet Mode key Press to put the machine into quiet mode While in quiet mode this key is lit in green Press the key again to exit quiet mode QEntering Quiet Mode Error indicator Blinks or lights up when an error such as a paper jam occurs E Wi Fi indicator Lights up when the machine is connected to wireless LAN D Processing Data indicator Blinks while operations such as sending or printing are being performed Lights up when there are documents waiting to be processed Start key Press to scan or copy documents gm key Press to enter symbols such as or gm key Press to switch the type of text that is entered 24 336 e COPY aso J Paper Save Copy L r 3 Menu key Press to start specifying many of the settings for the machine such as Timer Settings or Preferences Setting Menu List FI COPY SCAN key Press to switch the mode to copy or scan 3 ID Card Copy key Press to en

Untitled

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents